Panasonic Switch AV HS450N User Manual

Operating Instructions  
Multi-format Live Switcher  
Model No.  
AV-HS450N  
PO  
WER1  
OFF  
ON  
PO  
WER1  
ALARM1  
PO  
WER2  
OFF  
ON  
Mainframe  
PO  
WER2  
ALARM2  
[AV-HS450U1N]  
Multi-f  
or  
mat Liv  
e
Switcher  
A
V-HS450  
Multi-format Live Switcher AV-HS450  
POWER  
ALARM  
Control panel [AV-HS450C1N]  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for  
future use.  
Printed in Japan  
3TR006327AAC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety precautions  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the  
unit and the applicable safety instructions listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future  
reference.  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
10) Protect the power cord form being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the apparatus.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by  
the manufacturer.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand,  
tripod, bracket, or table specified  
by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is  
used, use caution when moving  
the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install  
in accordance with the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources  
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or  
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms  
or when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel. Servicing is required when the  
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such  
as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,  
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen  
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been  
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized  
plug has two blades with one wider than the  
other. A grounding-type plug has two blades  
and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or  
the third prong are provided for your safety. If  
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,  
consult an electrician for replacement of the  
obsolete outlet.  
indicates safety information.  
<For USA-California Only>  
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling  
may apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca/gov/hazardouswaste.perchlorate.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Description................................................7  
Features.....................................................7  
Configuration............................................9  
Accessories ..............................................9  
Precautions for use................................10  
3. Basic operations.................................33  
3-1. Background transition......................................33  
3-1-1. Selecting the bus ......................................33  
3-1-2. Selecting the bus using the  
SHIFT function .....................................33  
3-1-3. Selecting the bus mode ............................36  
3-1-4. Selecting the transition mode ...................37  
3-1-5. Manual transition (using the fader lever)...37  
3-1-6. Auto transition...........................................37  
3-1-7. Cut transition.............................................37  
Trademarks and  
Registered Trademarks.....................11  
Disclaimer of Warranty...........................11  
3-2. IMAGE.............................................................38  
3-2-1. Setting the IMAGE effects.........................38  
3-2-2. Executing the IMAGE effect......................39  
1. Installation...........................................12  
1-1. Installing the control panel...............................12  
1-2. Installing the mainframe ..................................13  
1-3. How to install the option boards ......................14  
3-3. Wipe ................................................................40  
3-3-1. Selecting the wipe pattern ........................40  
1-4. Connections ....................................................16  
1-4-1. Block diagram...........................................16  
3-3-2. Selecting the background for the  
3D2 pattern page .................................42  
1-4-2. Connections when implementing gen-lock  
(frame synchronizer OFF)....................17  
3-3-3. Selecting the wipe direction......................42  
3-3-4. Wipe decorations (border, soft effect).......43  
3-3-5. Setting the wipe start position...................44  
3-3-6. Modifying wipe..........................................45  
1-4-3. Connections when not implementing gen-  
lock (frame synchronizer ON) ..............18  
2. Functions in each area.......................19  
3-4. Key ..................................................................47  
3-4-1. Selecting the key type...............................48  
3-4-2. Selecting the key material.........................49  
3-4-3. Key transitions ..........................................50  
3-4-4. Key preview...............................................51  
2-1. Control panel...................................................19  
2-1-1. Crosspoint area ........................................20  
2-1-2. Wipe pattern/memory area.......................21  
2-1-3. User button area.......................................22  
2-1-4. Transition area ..........................................22  
2-1-5. LCD menu area ........................................25  
2-1-6. Positioner area..........................................27  
2-1-7. SD memory card area ..............................28  
2-1-8. Rear panel connections area....................29  
3-4-5. Adjusting the luminance key  
and linear key.......................................52  
3-4-6. Adjusting the chroma key .........................53  
3-4-7. Key decorations ........................................61  
3-4-8. Masking the key signals............................62  
3-4-9. Flying key..................................................63  
2-2. Mainframe .......................................................30  
2-2-1. Front panel................................................30  
2-2-2. Rear panel connections area....................31  
3-5. PinP (picture in picture)...................................64  
3-5-1. Selecting the PinP channel  
and material .........................................64  
3-5-2. Selecting Shape........................................65  
3-5-3. PinP preview.............................................65  
3-5-4. PinP transitions.........................................66  
3-5-5. PinP adjustments......................................66  
3-5-6. Linking PinP1 and PinP2..........................68  
3-5-7. PinP decorations.......................................69  
3-5-8. Trimming settings......................................70  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3-6. DSK (downstream key)....................................71  
3-6-1. Selecting the DSK type.............................71  
4. Input/output signal settings...............96  
4-1. Input signal settings.........................................96  
4-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer.................97  
4-1-2. Setting the input mode..............................98  
4-1-3. Freezing the input signals.........................99  
4-1-4. Color corrector........................................100  
4-1-5. Setting the up-converter .........................104  
4-1-6. Setting the analog input gain (option).....105  
3-6-2. Selecting the DSK channel and  
DSK fill material....................................73  
3-6-3. DSK transitions.........................................74  
3-6-4. DSK preview.............................................74  
3-6-5. DSK adjustments......................................75  
3-6-6. DSK decorations.......................................76  
3-6-7. Masking the DSK signals..........................77  
4-1-7. Setting the analog composite input signals  
(option)...............................................106  
3-7. FTB (fade to black)..........................................78  
3-8. Internal color signals .......................................79  
3-8-1. Setting the color background....................79  
4-2. Setting the DVI input signals (option) ............107  
4-2-1. Setting the DVI input signals...................107  
4-2-2. Adjusting the DVI input signals ...............111  
3-9. Switching the AUX output................................80  
3-9-1. Selecting the AUX output materials..........80  
3-9-2. AUX1 transitions.......................................81  
4-3. Setting the output signals..............................112  
4-3-1. Assigning the output signals...................113  
3-9-3. Setting enable/disable for the  
4-4. Setting the DVI output signals  
AUX1 transition.....................................82  
(OUT5 and OUT6 standard outputs and  
options).....................................................115  
3-10. Memory .........................................................83  
3-10-1. Memory registration and recall items......84  
4-5. Setting the down-converter (option) ..............117  
4-6. Setting the sync signals.................................118  
4-7. Adjusting the output signal phase .................119  
3-10-2. Storing the settings in the  
memory (Store) ...................................85  
3-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in the  
memory (Recall)...................................86  
4-8. Setting the multi view display ........................123  
4-8-1. Setting the screen layout ........................123  
4-8-2. Setting the split frame and characters ....125  
4-8-3. Setting the tally displays .........................126  
4-8-4. Changing the material names.................127  
4-8-5. High-resolution multi view mode.............128  
3-10-4. Deleting the operations stored in the  
memory (Delete) ..................................87  
3-10-5. Effect dissolve.........................................88  
3-11. Frame memories ...........................................89  
3-11-1. Transferring images from the AUX bus ...89  
3-11-2. Saving Images in Flash Memory ............90  
4-9. Setting the on-screen display (OSD).............129  
4-10. Setting the ancillary data.............................130  
3-12. SD memory cards .........................................91  
3-12-1. Initializing the SD memory cards............92  
3-12-2. Saving data on SD memory cards..........93  
3-12-3. Loading data from SD memory cards.....94  
3-12-4. Deleting files on SD memory cards ........95  
3-12-5. Displaying the SD memory card  
information...........................................95  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5. System settings................................131  
6. External interfaces ...........................154  
5-1. Selecting the video format.............................131  
6-1. Connecting the control panel  
and mainframe..........................................154  
5-2. Setting the crosspoints..................................132  
5-2-1. Assigning signals to the crosspoints.......132  
5-2-2. Setting the crosspoint switching .............134  
6-2. Mainframe .....................................................154  
6-2-1. LAN.........................................................154  
6-2-2. EDITOR ..................................................155  
6-2-3. COM .......................................................155  
6-2-4. TALLY/GPI...............................................156  
5-3. Button assignments.......................................135  
5-3-1. Setting the user buttons..........................135  
5-4. Setting the date and time ..............................137  
5-5. Network settings............................................138  
5-6. Other settings................................................139  
5-7. External device control..................................140  
6-3. Control panel.................................................157  
6-3-1. TALLY/GPI...............................................157  
7. Image transmission functions.........158  
8. Setting menu table............................163  
9. Appearance.......................................181  
10. Specifications .................................182  
Appendix (glossary).............................187  
5-7-1. Enable/Disable Setting for Control of  
External Devices ................................140  
5-7-2. Editor control...........................................141  
5-7-3. Setting the GPI .......................................142  
5-7-4. Camera control .......................................144  
5-8. Status displays ..............................................151  
5-8-1. Alarm status displays..............................151  
5-8-2. Alarm message.......................................151  
5-8-3. Displaying the version information and  
option information................................152  
5-9. Initialization....................................................153  
5-9-1. Initializing Setting Data...........................153  
5-9-2. Initializing Fader......................................153  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description  
This is a 1 ME digital video switcher which supports a multiple number of HD and SD formats.  
It consists of a mainframe and control panel.  
Despite its compact dimensions of 2RU, the mainframe comes with 16 inputs and four outputs for SDI under the  
standard specifications.  
It also supports two DVI outputs, and its video effects of one key line, two DSK lines, two PinP lines, two DVE  
(BKGD) lines, one DVE (key) line and two multi view lines enable video productions in a wide variety of forms.  
Incorporated in the switcher’s inputs are a frame synchronizer, up-converter and color corrector.  
When the option boards are installed, a wider variety of input/output formats including analog composite, analog  
component and DVI can be accommodated so that systems can be constructed flexibly.  
Features  
Compact design, wide variety of input/output signals  
The mainframe, despite its compact dimensions of 2RU, comes with a wide variety of input/output facilities in  
the standard configuration.  
As input facilities, a total of 16 HD/SD-SDI signal lines are supported under the standard specifications, and a  
frame synchronizer is incorporated for all the inputs. Also incorporated are four up-converter signal lines and  
eight color corrector signal lines.  
The output facilities include four HD/SD-SDI signal lines and two DVI-D signal lines under the standard  
specifications.  
Two option slots each for input/output applications are provided.  
When two option boards for input applications are installed, the maximum number of input signal lines can be  
expanded to 20; similarly, when two option boards for output applications are installed, the maximum number of  
output signal lines can be increased to 10.  
Multiple formats supported  
The signal formats supported include HD formats (1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/24PsF 1, 1080/23.98PsF 1  
,
720/59.94p and 720/50p), SD formats (480/59.94i and 576/50i) and DVI 2  
.
1: The following option boards are not supported:  
AV-HS04M1, AV-HS04M2, AV-HS04M3, AV-HS04M4, AV-HS04M5,  
AV-HS04M6, AV-HS04M7  
2: The standard DVI output is the DVI-D signal output.  
The AV-HS04M3 option board supports DVI-I signal input, the AV-HS04M8 option board supports DVI-D  
signal input, and the AV-HS04M5 supports DVI-I signal output.  
Multi view display function  
Two multi view display function lines are provided under the standard specifications.  
It is possible to divide up to 20 lines of video including program video (PGM), preview video (PVW) and input  
video signals between two screens and display them at the same time on two monitors.  
Frame synchronizer system and external synchronization system supported  
A high-performance 10-bit frame synchronizer is incorporated for all the inputs so that asynchronous video  
signals can be input. By using the black burst (BB) output, it is possible to construct a system referenced to the  
synchronization of the switcher.  
A genlock function is provided so that external synchronization systems using external sync signals (BB or TRI  
signals) as a reference are also supported.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Many different effect functions incorporated  
Along with the standard wipe, mix and cut functions, the switcher can provide size reduction, slide and other  
DVE transitions.  
DVE transitions using the 2-screen push-out effect and other 2-channel functions are possible.  
The unit comes with luminance keys and chroma keys provided as keyers as well as specialized hardware in  
the form of two DSK lines and two PinP lines as a standard option.  
AUX1 is equipped with a mix transition function.  
This enables MIX transitions with the material selected next, allowing for a flexible system construction.  
High-quality chroma keys using Primatte® algorithms  
The Primatte® algorithm, which has proven to be very popular in many non-linear editors as a plug-in software,  
has been put to practical use in a linear editing system for the chroma keys. High chroma key image quality can  
be achieved through some simple operations.  
Primatte® is a registered trademark of IMAGICA DIGIX Inc.  
The copyrights of Primatte® belong to IMAGICA DIGIX Inc.  
The patents for Primatte® belong to IMAGICA DIGIX Inc.  
SDHC memory cards supported  
Still image data (BMP, JPEG) can be imported from SDHC memory cards into the unit’s frame memories for use  
as background images or key materials.  
In addition, the images and setting data in the unit’s frame memories can be stored on the SDHC memory  
cards.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
Pan-tilt head system (pan-tilt head and convertible camera) control supported  
Using the COM connector, a Panasonic pan-tilt head system (with pan, tilt, zoom, focus and preset functions)  
can be controlled.  
When a controller is used, up to five pan-tilt head systems can be controlled.  
Camera menu operations can also be performed.  
Controllers supported  
Pan-tilt heads supported  
Camera supported  
AW-RP555N, AW-RP655N  
AW-PH400P, AW-PH405N, AW-PH360N  
AW-HE100N  
Redundant power supply  
Under the standard specifications, a redundant power supply is provided so that live operations can be  
undertaken with complete peace of mind.  
Simple operability  
Live transmissions can be delivered speedily thanks to the 16 crosspoint buttons and pattern selection buttons  
and other controls on the panel with its simple layout that enables various functions to be operated directly.  
Preset-like operations are performed using menus appearing on the unit’s LCD display or on the on-screen  
displays.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Mainframe [AV-HS450U1N] .............................................................................. 1  
Control panel [AV-HS450C1N] .......................................................................... 1  
Accessories  
Operating instructions ....................................................................................... 1  
CD-ROM (Operating instructions/Image transmission software) ...................... 1  
AC adapters (for control panel) ......................................................................... 2  
Power cords (for mainframe and AC adapter) .................................................. 4  
CAT5E cable (STP, straight cable, 10 m long) .................................................. 1  
Optional boards (sold separately)  
Board  
Model number  
AV-HS04M1  
AV-HS04M2  
AV-HS04M3  
AV-HS04M4  
AV-HS04M5  
Function  
SDI Input Board  
SDI input 2 lines  
Analog Input Board  
DVI Input Board  
Analog component input 2 lines  
DVI-I input 2 lines  
Analog Output Board  
DVI/Analog Output Board  
Analog component output 2 lines  
DVI-I output 1 line  
Analog component output 1 line  
Analog Composite Input Board  
SDI Output Board  
AV-HS04M6  
AV-HS04M7  
AV-HS04M8  
Analog composite input 2 lines  
SDI output 2 lines  
Full-HD DVI Input Board  
DVI-D input 2 line  
Option boards are installed in the two input/output option slots (slot A, slot B).  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions for use  
Handle carefully.  
Do not drop the product, or subject it to strong shock or vibration.  
Do not carry or move the product by the fader lever. This is important to prevent trouble.  
Use the product in an ambient temperature of 32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to 40 °C).  
Avoid using the product at a cold place below 32 °F (0 °C) or at a hot place above 104 °F (40 °C) because  
extremely low or high temperature will adversely affect the parts inside.  
Power off before connecting or disconnecting cables.  
Before plugging or unplugging the cables, be sure to switch power off.  
Avoid humidity and dust.  
Avoid using the product at a humid, dusty place because much humidity and dust will cause damage to the  
parts inside.  
Maintenance  
Wipe the product using a dry cloth. To remove stubborn dirt, dip a cloth into a diluted solution of kitchen  
detergent (neutral), wring it out well, and wipe the product gently. Then, after wiping the product with a moist  
cloth, wipe it again with a dry cloth.  
Caution  
• Avoid using benzine, paint thinners and other volatile fluids.  
• If a chemical cleaning cloth is to be used, carefully read through the precautions for its use.  
Precaution to be observed during production  
This product’s image switching and image effect functions can be used to produce images which flicker rapidly  
or images which change rapidly.  
However, bear in mind when using these functions in production that the kinds of images produced may have  
an adverse effect on the viewer’s physical well-being.  
Handling the optional boards  
Be absolutely sure to turn off the power of the product before installing or removing any of the optional boards.  
Furthermore, when installing or removing the optional boards, take care not to hurt yourself on the edges and  
metal parts of the boards.  
When the product is to be discarded  
When the product is to be discarded at the end of its service life, ask a specialized contractor to dispose of it  
properly in order to protect the environment.  
Concerning the consumable parts  
Cooling fan:  
This is a consumable part. As a general rule, replace it every 5 years or so (when the unit has been  
operated for 15 hours a day).  
Power supply unit:  
This is a consumable part. As a general rule, replace it every 5 years or so (when the unit has been  
operated for 15 hours a day).  
The period when the consumable parts need to be replaced will differ depending on the operating conditions.  
When the time comes to replace one of these parts, be absolutely sure to ask your dealer to do the job.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions for use  
Trademarks and Registered Trademarks  
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and other countries.  
Adobe and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
SDHC logo is a trademark.  
Other names of companies and products contained in these operating instructions may be trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective owners.  
Disclaimer of Warranty  
IN NO EVENT SHALL Panasonic Corporation BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PERSON, EXCEPT FOR  
REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:  
  
ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;  
  
PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT  
OPERATION OF THE USER;  
  
UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFICATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;  
  
INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN IMAGES ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY  
REASON OR CAUSE INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR PROBLEM OF THE PRODUCT;  
  
ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE, OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE  
SYSTEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY;  
  
INCONVENIENCE, DAMAGE, OR LOSS RESULTING FROM ACCIDENTS CAUSED BY AN INADEQUATE  
INSTALLATION METHOD OR ANYTHING OTHER THAN A DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT;  
  
LOSS OF REGISTERED DATA CAUSED BY ANY FAILURE.  
  
ANY DAMAGE OR CLAIMS DUE TO LOSS OR LEAKAGE OF IMAGE DATA OR SETTING DATA SAVED  
ON THIS UNIT OR ON AN SD CARD OR PC.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-1. Installing the control panel  
Follow the instructions set forth in “Safety precautions” and also observe the  
cautionary items below.  
Be absolutely sure to ask your dealer to do the jobs of installing and connecting the panel.  
Connecting the power supply  
Be absolutely sure to use only the power cord and AC adapter supplied with the  
panel.  
Be absolutely sure to connect the grounding terminal of the power cord to  
ground.  
Also connect the ground terminal (SIGNAL GND) at the rear of the panel to the  
system ground.  
Dust-proof cap  
If only one AC adapter is to be connected, place the dust-proof cap over the DC  
power input socket that is not going to be used.  
To prevent the DC plug from being disconnected, secure the cable of the AC  
adapter to the cable clamp.  
R
WE  
PO  
F
OF  
ON  
2
IN  
V
12  
1
IN  
12  
LCD CONTRAST  
MAINFRAME  
When the control panel is not going to be used for a prolonged period of time,  
set its power switch to the “off” position to conserve power, and disconnect the  
power plug.  
Cable clamp  
Handle the control panel carefully!  
Dropping the control panel or subjecting it to strong impact or vibration may cause trouble and/or malfunctioning.  
Do not allow any foreign objects to enter inside the control panel!  
Allowing water, metal items, scraps of food or other foreign objects inside the control panel may cause a fire  
and/or electric shocks.  
Choosing the best installation location  
This unit is designed for indoor use only.  
Install the unit on a sufficiently strong, stable and level  
surface for use.  
Ensure a space of at least 100 mm around the rear  
vents to avoid obstructing ventilation.  
In particular, ensure sufficient space between  
ventilation and wiring when using mounted in a panel  
or table.  
Ventilation holes  
Multi-format Live Switcher AV-HS450  
POWER  
ALARM  
Do not install the panel in a cold place where the  
temperatures will drop below 32 °F (0 °C) or in a hot  
place where the temperatures will rise above 104 °F  
(40 °C).  
Avoid installing the panel where it will be exposed to  
direct sunlight or to the hot air that is blown out from  
other products.  
Installing the panel in a very humid, dusty or vibration-  
prone location may give rise to trouble.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-2. Installing the mainframe  
Comply with the instructions set forth in “Safety precautions” and also observe  
the cautionary items below.  
Be absolutely sure to ask your dealer to do the jobs of installing and connecting the mainframe.  
Connecting the power supply  
Be absolutely sure to use the power cord supplied with the mainframe.  
Be absolutely sure to connect the grounding terminal of the power cord to ground.  
Handle the mainframe carefully!  
Dropping the mainframe or subjecting it to strong impact or vibration may cause trouble and/or malfunctioning.  
Do not allow any foreign objects to enter inside the mainframe!  
Allowing water, metal items, scraps of food or other foreign objects inside the control panel may cause a fire  
and/or electric shocks.  
Choosing the best installation location  
This unit is designed for indoor use only.  
Mount the mainframe securely in a standard 19-inch rack (with a depth dimension of at least 600 mm) that  
meets the EIA standard or its equivalent for use.  
Install the mainframe securely using screws that are compatible with the rack.  
Be absolutely sure to attach the support guides used to support the back part of the mainframe. (Provide  
support guides that are compatible with the rack.)  
Provide sufficient clearances from the area around the ventilation holes at the front and the cooling fan at the  
back.  
Do not install the mainframe in a cold place where the temperatures will drop below 32 °F (0 °C) or in a hot  
place where the temperatures will rise above 104 °F (40 °C).  
Avoid installing the mainframe where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or to the hot air that is blown out from  
other products.  
Installing the mainframe in a very humid, dusty or vibration-prone location may give rise to trouble.  
Support guides  
POWER1  
OFF  
ON  
POWER1  
ALARM1  
POWER2  
OFF  
ON  
POWER2  
ALARM2  
Multi-f  
ormat Liv  
e
Switcher  
A
WER2  
PO  
-HS450  
V
V-HS450  
R2ON  
ALARM2  
WE  
PO  
e
Switcher  
OFF  
mat Liv  
or  
Multi-f  
WER1  
PO  
ON  
ALARM1  
WER1  
PO  
OFF  
Installation in a rack  
Flow of air through the ventilation holes  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-3. How to install the option boards  
The option boards are installed in the mainframe.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the option board concerned.  
Notes  
Be absolutely sure to ask your dealer to do the job of installing or removing the option boards.  
Before installing or removing an option board, turn off the power, and disconnect the power plug.  
Before coming into physical contact with the option board, touch your hand to metal that has been grounded  
to discharge the static electricity in your body.  
A safe way to proceed is to wear an anti-static wrist strap.  
The option board may be damaged if you touch the board with static still in your body.  
Avoid damage to the option board by not dropping it or subjecting it to strong shocks or vibrations.  
After removing an option board, be absolutely sure to attach the blank panel.  
When installing or removing an option board, take care not to hurt yourself on the edges or metal parts of the  
board.  
  
Turn off the power of the mainframe, and disconnect the power cord.  
  
Loosen the two screws of SLOT A or SLOT B at the back of the mainframe, and remove the blank panel.  
SLOT A  
SLOT B  
Blank panel  
Screw  
Screw  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
  
Align the option board with the guide rails, and insert it slowly.  
Insert it until it will go no further. Take care not to exert excessive force while doing this since that may damage  
the connector inside.  
  
Mount the option board in place using the two screws.  
Clamping torque: 0.7 N•m  
VI-D  
D
UTS  
VI INP  
D
VI-D  
D
Screw  
Screw  
  
After connecting the necessary cables, plug the power cord into the power outlet, and turn on the power.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-4. Connections  
1-4-1. Block diagram  
Mainframe  
Black  
ColorBGD  
ColorBar  
BKGD  
CUT, MIX, WIPE, DVE2  
FS  
INPUT  
1 to 8  
KEY  
OUTPUT  
1 to 4  
OUTPUT (SDI)  
FMEM1 to 4  
CUT, MIX, WIPE, DVE  
1 to 4 (3)  
PinP1, 2  
MIX  
FS  
INPUT  
9 to 12  
INPUT (SDI)  
1 to 16  
Output  
MTX  
DSK1, 2  
MIX  
CC  
MTX  
OUTPUT  
5, 6  
FTB  
AUX1 to 4  
OUTPUT (DVI-D)  
5, 6  
FS  
UC  
CC  
INPUT  
13 to 16  
MV1, 2  
OUTPUT  
A1, A2  
INPUT  
A1, A2  
Option slot A  
OUTPUT  
B1, B2  
INPUT  
B1, B2  
Option slot B  
AC IN  
REF  
AC/DC  
AC/DC  
Power  
REF IN/OUT (1)  
REF OUT (2)  
RJ45  
RJ45  
Dsub 50  
Dsub 9  
Dsub 9  
LAN  
(5)  
PANEL  
(4)  
TALLY/GPI EDITOR  
COM  
ALARM: 1  
GPI-OUT: 31  
GPI-IN: 8  
Camera  
Pan/Tilt Head  
Controller  
SD  
memory  
card  
ALARM: 1  
GPI-OUT: 8  
GPI-IN: 8  
PC  
MAINFRAME  
TALLY/GPI  
Dsub 25  
RJ45  
DC IN  
AC/DC  
Power  
Editing  
controller  
AC/DC  
Aux panel  
Control panel  
1: When external synchronization is selected as the  
reference signal setting, the reference signal is input.  
When internal synchronization is selected, the reference  
signal is output.  
2: When external synchronization is selected as the  
reference signal setting, the signals are looped through  
and output. When internal synchronization is selected, the  
reference signal is output.  
3: Two sets of the same output signals are distributed from  
OUTPUT (SDI) 1.  
4: Connect the PANEL connector directly to the  
MAINFRAME connector using the supplied CAT5E cable.  
5: Do not connect to a public line when connecting a PC.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-4-2. Connections when implementing gen-lock  
(frame synchronizer OFF)  
Sync Generator  
HD camera  
HD camera  
HD SDI  
HD SDI  
VTR  
HD SDI  
HD camera  
HD SDI  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
IN1  
IN2  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
LAN  
PANEL  
TALLY/GPI  
Multi-format Live  
Switcher  
AV-HS450N  
HD SDI  
HD SDI  
HD SDI monitor  
HD SDI monitor  
Power cord  
LCD CONTRAST  
SERVICE  
NORMAL  
12V IN  
1
12V IN  
2
TALLY  
/
GPI  
MAINFRAME  
POWER  
ON OFF  
AL  
ND  
DVI-D  
DVI-D  
PC monitor  
PC monitor  
AC adapter  
When the unit is to be installed and when the connections are to be performed, be absolutely  
sure to ask your dealer to be responsible for carrying out the work that needs to be done.  
Use a 3-point power outlet as the power source in order to earth the unit securely.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Installation  
1-4-3. Connections when not implementing gen-lock  
(frame synchronizer ON)  
Example where the optional board is used  
SLOT A: Analog Input Board (AV-HS04M2)  
SLOT B: Full-HD DVI Input Board (AV-HS04M8)  
PC  
HD Component  
DVI-D  
PC  
HD camera  
HD Component  
DVI-D  
DVD player  
VTR  
HD SDI  
SD SDI  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
ANALOG INPUTS  
DVI INPUTS  
IN1  
Y
Pb  
Pr  
Y
Pb  
Pr  
DVI-D  
DVI-D  
HD camera  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
IN2  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
LAN  
PANEL  
TALLY/GPI  
Multi-format Live  
Switcher  
AV-HS450N  
HD SDI  
HD SDI  
DVI-D  
HD SDI monitor  
HD SDI monitor  
PC monitor  
Power cord  
LCD CONTRAST  
SERVICE  
NORMAL  
12V IN  
1
12V IN  
2
TALLY  
/
GPI  
MAINFRAME  
POWER  
ON OFF  
SNAL  
ND  
AC adapter  
DVI-D  
PC monitor  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1. Control panel  
User button area  
Wipe pattern/memory area  
LCD menu area  
SD memory card area Positioner area  
Multi-format Live Switcher AV-HS450  
PAGE  
WIPE  
SHOT  
MEM  
1
4
7
2
3
STOR  
1
4
7
2
5
3
Z
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
POWER  
ALARM  
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
HOLD  
DEL  
8
9
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
POSITIONER  
1
4
2
3
6
8
9
KEY  
PinP1  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE  
IMAGE  
A
B
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
BKGD  
AUX2  
UNDO  
N/R  
R
CKEY  
PinP2  
CBGD  
CAM  
MV  
OUT  
5
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
PATTERN  
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
AMBER:1  
DSK 1/2  
GREEN :2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
WIPE DIRECTION  
/
MENU FUNCTION  
/
AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
MEMORY  
/
AUX  
MIX  
KEY  
ON  
FTB  
ON  
SHIFT  
WIPE  
BKGD  
MIX  
KEY  
ON  
PinP1  
ON  
PinP2  
ON  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
SHIFT  
16/32  
WIPE  
1/17  
2/18  
3/19  
4/20  
5/21  
6/22  
7/23  
8/24  
9/25  
10/26  
11/27  
12/28  
13/29  
14/30  
15/31  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
SHIFT  
CUT  
AUTO  
Crosspoint area  
Transition area  
Power indicator [POWER]  
This indicator lights when the power switch ( ) on the rear panel is set to ON while power is supplied to the  
DC power input socket.  
It goes off when the power switch ( ) is set to OFF.  
Alarm indicator [ALARM]  
This indicator lights when the mainframe’s cooling fan has stopped running or when there is a problem (voltage  
drop) with the power supply of the mainframe or the control panel.  
When this occurs, an alarm message is displayed on the LCD and on the OSD screen of the external monitor.  
During the occurrence of an alarm, details of the trouble can be checked using the SYSTEM/Alarm menu.  
Alarm information can be output to an external device from the control panel’s TALLY/GPI connector ( ).  
For details, refer to “5-8-2. Alarm message”.  
If the alarm goes off, stop using the unit immediately and be sure to contact your dealer.  
Continuing to use the unit even after the alarm goes off could damage it.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-1. Crosspoint area  
1
4
2
3
6
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE  
IMAGE  
A
B
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
5
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
AMBER:1  
DSK 1/2  
GREEN :2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
/
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
SHIFT  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
SHIFT  
16/32  
1/17  
2/18  
3/19  
4/20  
5/21  
6/22  
7/23  
8/24  
9/25  
10/26  
11/27  
12/28  
13/29  
14/30  
15/31  
SHIFT  
PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons [PGM/A 1 to 32]  
These are used to select the PGM/A bus video signals.  
Buttons 1 to 32 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button.  
Refer to “3-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function”.  
In the case of the flip-flop system, the main line video (PGM) signals are always selected.  
    
When one of the crosspoint buttons (  
the crosspoint button are displayed.  
,
,
) is held down, the name of the input material and the number of  
PST/B bus crosspoint buttons [PST/B 1 to 32]  
These are used to select the PST/B bus video signals.  
Buttons 1 to 32 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button.  
Refer to “3-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function”.  
In the case of the flip-flop system, the images inserted next (PST) are always selected.  
AUX bus selector buttons [KEY, PinP 1/2, DSK 1/2, AUX1 to AUX4]  
Select the bus to be operated using the AUX bus crosspoint buttons ( ).  
The selected button lights.  
[KEY]:  
This button is used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons ( ) into the selector buttons for the sources  
of the key fill buses.  
The source for the key source bus can be set using the menu displayed when the AUX bus crosspoint  
buttons ( ) are held down. The set source will be the same for DSK1 and DSK2.  
The source can also be set from the CONFIG menu.  
[PinP 1/2]:  
This button is used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons ( ) into the selector buttons for the sources  
of the PinP buses.  
Each time it is pressed, its target is switched between PinP1 and PinP2.  
When PinP1 is selected, the button lights in amber; when PinP2 is selected, it lights in green.  
[DSK 1/2]:  
This button is used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons ( ) into the selector buttons for the sources  
of the DSK fill buses.  
Each time it is pressed, its target is switched between DSK1 and DSK2.  
When DSK1 is selected, the button lights in amber; when DSK2 is selected, it lights in green.  
[AUX1] - [AUX4]:  
These buttons are used to change the AUX bus crosspoint buttons ( ) into the selector buttons for the  
sources of the AUX buses.  
The AUX bus selector buttons are also used as the menu function buttons ( ).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
AUX bus crosspoint buttons  
These buttons are used to select the source of the bus which was selected by the AUX bus selector button ( ).  
Buttons 1 to 32 can be selected using the [SHIFT] button.  
Refer to “3-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function”.  
2-1-2. Wipe pattern/memory area  
PAGE  
SHOT  
MEM  
1
4
7
2
3
Wipe pattern and memory selector buttons  
STOR  
WIPE  
SQ1 SQ2  
1
4
7
2
5
3
Wipe patterns 1 to 12 can be selected while the BKGD and KEY  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
pattern selector buttons ( ) are lighted.  
5
6
Data can be stored in the memories of buttons 1 to 10 or  
recalled from these memories while one of the memory  
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
DEL  
8
9
8
9
operation buttons ( ) — [SHOT MEM], [BKGD WIPE MEM],  
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
[PinP MEM] or [CAM MEM] — is lighted.  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
BKGD, KEY pattern selector buttons [BKGD PATT] [KEY PATT]  
Press the [BKGD PATT] button, and while it is lighted, select the wipe pattern for the background transition.  
Similarly, press the [KEY PATT] button, and while it is lighted, select the wipe pattern for the key transition.  
Each time the [BKGD PATT] button and [KEY PATT] button are pressed, the pattern page changes in the  
following sequence: WIPE, SQ1 (squeeze 1), SL1 (slide 1), 3D1 (3 dimensions 1), SQ2 (squeeze 2), SL2  
(slide 2) and 3D2 (3 dimensions 2). Which pattern page has been selected can be checked by observing which  
pattern page indicator LED ( ) is lighted.  
SQ2, SL2, and 3D2 may not be selected as the wipe pattern for the key transition.  
Pattern page indicator LEDs [PAGE]  
By observing which pattern page indicator LED is lighted, it is possible to check which pattern page has been  
selected by the BKDG PATT or KEY PATT selector button ( ).  
Memory operation buttons [SHOT MEM] [BKGD WIPE MEM] [PinP MEM] [CAM MEM]  
[STOR] [RECALL] [DEL] [UNDO]  
Press the [SHOT MEM], [BKGD WIPE MEM], [PinP MEM] or [CAM MEM] button to perform the memory  
operations for the number keys (1 to 10).  
[STOR]:  
Press this to register data in the memory.  
[RECALL]:  
Press this to recall data from the memory.  
[DEL]:  
Press this to delete data in the memory.  
[UNDO]:  
Press this to undo the operation of the [RECALL] or [DEL] button.  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
This operation cannot be performed using memory operations when the [CAM MEM] button has been  
pressed.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-3. User button area  
User buttons [USER1 to USER6]  
These are used to assign some functions of the menu settings to the [USER1]  
to [USER6] buttons on the CONFIG menu.  
See “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
1
4
2
3
6
5
USER  
2-1-4. Transition area  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
N/R  
R
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
WIPE DIRECTION  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
MIX  
KEY  
ON  
FTB  
ON  
WIPE  
BKGD  
MIX  
KEY  
ON  
PinP1  
ON  
PinP2  
ON  
WIPE  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
CUT  
AUTO  
[BKGD] button  
This executes the background transition when the [AUTO] button ( ) or fader lever ( ) has been operated.  
When the [BKGD] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber.  
If the [KEY] button ( ) is now pressed, the indicator goes off, and the de-selected status is established.  
When the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button ( ) are pressed at the same time, both buttons are set to the  
selected status.  
[KEY] button  
This executes the key transition when the [AUTO] button ( ) or fader lever ( ) has been operated.  
When the [KEY] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber.  
If the [BKGD] button ( ) is now pressed, the indicator goes off, and the de-selected status is established.  
When the [BKGD] button ( ) and [KEY] button are pressed at the same time, both buttons are set to the  
selected status.  
KEY ON tally LED  
This lights in red when the key ON status is established.  
MIX, WIPE selection status tally LEDs  
These light up to indicate whether MIX or WIPE has been selected when background transitions or key  
transitions are executed.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
[MIX] button  
This is used to switch the A and B bus images while making them overlap.  
During the transition, the A and B bus output total is kept at 100 %.  
When the [MIX] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber.  
If the [WIPE] button ( ) is now pressed, it goes off, and the de-selected status is established.  
[WIPE] button  
This is used to execute the transition using the pattern selected by the wipe pattern selector button ( ).  
When the [WIPE] button is pressed and it is selected, its indicator lights in amber.  
If the [MIX] button ( ) is now pressed, it goes off, and the de-selected status is established.  
[AUTO] button  
This is used to automatically execute transitions (auto transition) using the transition time which has been set  
on the TIME menu.  
During auto transition its indicator lights in amber. When the button is pressed again during auto transition, the  
auto transition operation is suspended, and the indicator lights in green. When it is pressed again while auto  
transition is suspended, the remaining transition is executed.  
The indicator goes off when auto transition is completed.  
When the [AUTO] button is pressed while the fader lever ( ) is at an interim setting, the transition is executed  
in the time remaining from the interim setting.  
[CUT] button  
This button is used to execute transitions instantly.  
Its indicator lights in amber during a transition, and it goes off when the transition is completed.  
[KEY ON] button  
This button is used to execute the key transition for the transition time which has been set on the TIME menu.  
[FTB ON] button  
This button is used to execute fade-out to a black screen or fade-in from a black screen for the transition time  
which has been set on the TIME menu.  
PinP button [PinP1 ON] [PinP2 ON]  
This button is used to execute fade-in or fade-out of the picture in picture for the transition time which has been  
set on the TIME menu.  
DSK button [DSK1 ON] [DSK2 ON]  
This button is used to execute fade-in or fade-out of downstream key for the transition time which has been set  
on the TIME menu.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
Wipe direction selection buttons [WIPE DIRECTION N/R, R]  
These buttons are used to select the direction in which to wipe for executing background transitions.  
When the [R] indicator is off:  
Wiping proceeds in the normal direction.  
When the [R] indicator is lighted:  
Wiping proceeds in the reverse direction.  
When the [N/R] indicator is lighted:  
The normal direction is replaced with the reverse direction (or vice versa) when the transition is  
completed. (The lighted and extinguished statuses of the [R] button are also switched in line with the  
direction of the wiping.)  
Fader lever  
This is used to execute background or key transitions. When it is moved as far as it will go, the transition  
is completed. When it has been operated during auto transition, auto transition will be switched to manual  
operation as soon as the fader position overtakes the amount of the transition being executed.  
Bus tally LEDs  
These indicate the output statuses of the A bus and B bus. The LED corresponding to the bus whose program  
signals (PGM) are being output lights.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-5. LCD menu area  
POWER  
ALARM  
HOLD  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE  
IMAGE  
A
B
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
AMBER:1  
DSK 1/2  
GREEN :2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
/
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
LCD  
The setting menu is displayed when one of the menu function buttons ( ) is pressed.  
When the buttons listed below are double-clicked, the specified menu is selected. (The menu delegation  
function)  
The operation corresponding to the button pressed is also executed.  
<List of menu delegation functions>  
Button  
BKGD  
KEY  
Menu  
Transition area  
TIME menu/BKGD sub menu  
TIME menu/KEY sub menu  
WIPE  
BKGD menu/Border sub menu  
BKGD menu/WIPEPos sub menu  
Wipe pattern area  
WIPE #5  
(BKGD)  
WIPE #5  
(KEY)  
KEY menu/WIPEPos sub menu  
BKGD menu/WIPEPos sub menu  
KEY menu/WIPEPos sub menu  
BKGD menu/SQPos sub menu  
KEY menu/SQPos sub menu  
KEY menu/FlyKEY sub menu  
WIPE #11  
(BKGD)  
WIPE #11  
(KEY)  
SQ #5  
(BKGD)  
SQ #5  
(KEY)  
SL #5  
(KEY)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
Menu function buttons [MENU FUNCTION/AUX BUS DELEGATION]  
These are used to select the menus organized by function.  
Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the menu for its function is switched between the one displayed  
above and the one displayed below. Each time the [PinP1/PinP2] button or [DSK1/DSK2] button is pressed, the  
color used for their lighting is switched between amber and green. The other buttons light in amber.  
Rotary encoders [F1] to [F5]  
These are used to set the parameters displayed on the menus (LCD screen or on-screen display).  
For details on the operations, refer to the sections in “3. Basic operations”.  
[F1]:  
Rotate this rotary encoder to switch the sub menu.  
On the INPUT menu or OUTPUT menu, the signal to be set is switched.  
Turn this rotary encoder to set the parameters.  
[F2]:  
On the INPUT menu or OUTPUT menu, the third menu is switched.  
[F3] to [F5]: Rotate these rotary encoders to set the parameters.  
When the down arrow () is shown at a menu item, its parameter is set by pressing the corresponding rotary  
encoder.  
When the parameter is one which is set using a numerical value, its default will be restored when the rotary  
encoder is held down.  
(However, the network settings and the date and time settings will not be returned to the defaults.)  
Basic menu operations  
For detailed operations, refer to the sections in “3. Basic operations”.  
For the menu configurations, refer to “8. Setting menu table”.  
  
Select the menus organized by function using the menu function buttons ( ).  
  
Using the rotary encoders ( ), display the sub menu that will be used to establish the detailed settings,  
and set the parameters.  
Parameter setting area  
Third menu  
|
|
|
|
KEY 2 Clip Gain Density Invert  
Adjust | 0.0| 100.0| 100.0| Off  
Sub menu  
Operate here  
using [F1].  
Operate here  
using [F3].  
Operate here  
using [F5].  
Operate here  
using [F2].  
Operate here  
using [F4].  
The INPUT menu and OUTPUT menu differ depending on whether an option board has been installed.  
[HOLD] button  
If the [HOLD] button is pressed while a menu is displayed, no other menu will be selected even when a menu  
function button ( ) is pressed.  
In addition, even if the AUX bus selection button ( ) is pressed it will not switch to another bus.  
While the [HOLD] button is held down, it lights in amber.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-6. Positioner area  
Positioner [X/Y]  
These are used when performing the settings below.  
PinP1, PinP2 position settings  
Wipe start position setting (WIPE #5, WIPE #11, SQ #5)  
Camera control  
Z
Flying key position setting  
POSITIONER  
Chroma key marker position setting  
In each case, the settings take effect only when the following menu items have been selected.  
Note  
The center values of the positioner are set during the time it takes for the unit to start up after its power is  
turned on. Do not operate the positioner until after the switcher has started up.  
Rotary encoder [Z]  
This is used to set the PinP size, flying key size or to select the chroma key area.  
In each case, the settings take effect only when the following menu items have been selected.  
Positioner  
X/Y  
Rotary encoder  
Valid menu  
Z
Switch  
Hold switch down to  
PinP1, PinP2  
Position adjustments  
Size adjustments  
All PinP1 and PinP2  
menus (except for  
(size increased by rotating restore initial values  
the encoder clockwise  
and reduced by rotating it  
counterclockwise)  
(X/Y, Z).  
PinP1, PinP2/Rotation)  
Rotation angle  
adjustments  
(X-direction and  
Y-direction rotation)  
Rotation angle  
adjustments  
(Z-direction rotation)  
Hold switch down to  
restore initial values  
(X/Y, Z).  
PinP1, PinP2/  
Rotation  
WIPE (BKGD)  
WIPE (KEY)  
Chroma key  
Start position  
adjustments  
Hold switch down to  
restore initial values  
(X/Y).  
BKGD/WIPEPos  
BKGD/SQPos  
Start position  
adjustments  
Hold switch down to  
restore initial values  
(X/Y).  
KEY/WIPEPos  
KEY/SQPos  
Selection position  
adjustments  
Selected area size  
adjustments  
Execute sampling  
CHR KEY/Sample1  
CHR KEY/Sample2  
(size increased by rotating  
the encoder clockwise  
and reduced by rotating it  
counterclockwise)  
Flying key  
Position adjustments  
Size adjustments  
Hold switch down to  
KEY/FlyKEY  
(size increased by rotating restore initial values  
the encoder clockwise  
and reduced by rotating it  
counterclockwise)  
(X/Y, Z).  
Camera control X: Pan control or focus  
Switching between  
pan/tilt control and  
zoom/focus control  
All menus other than  
those listed above  
control  
Y: Tilt control or zoom  
control  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-7. SD memory card area  
SD memory card slot  
Insert an SD memory card (purchased separately) or an SDHC memory card  
(purchased separately) into this slot.  
SD memory card access LED  
This LED lights while the data on the SD memory card is being accessed.  
Do not turn off the unit’s power or eject the SD memory card while the access LED is lighted.  
Doing so can damage the data on the SD memory card.  
Concerning the recommended SD memory cards and SDHC memory cards  
Use of the following SD memory cards and SDHC memory cards made by Panasonic is recommended:  
SDHC memory cards RP-SDM04G, RP-SDM06G, RP-SDM08G,  
RP-SDM12G, RP-SDM12G  
RP-SDV04G, RP-SDV08G, RP-SDV16G,  
RP-SDV32G  
SD memory cards  
RP-SD128B, RP-SD256B  
RP-SDR512  
RP-SDM01G, RP-SDM02G  
RP-SDV512, RP-SDV01G, RP-SDV02G  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-1-8. Rear panel connections area  
LCD CONTRAST  
SERVICE  
NORMAL  
12V IN  
1
12V IN  
2
TALLY  
/
GPI  
MAINFRAME  
POWER  
ON OFF  
SIGNAL  
GND  
   
TALLY/GPI input/output connector [TALLY/GPI] (D-sub 25-pin, female, inch screw)  
For details on how to connect this connector, refer to “6. External interfaces”.  
MAIN FRAME connector [MAIN FRAME] (RJ-45) (100 Base-TX)  
Connect this to the mainframe using the supplied CAT5E cable (STP, straight, 10 m).  
DC power input sockets [12V  
IN1], [12V  
IN2] (DC 12 V, 0.8 A)  
Connect the supplied AC adapters (for the control panel) to these sockets.  
Ground connector [SIGNAL GND]  
Connect to the system’s earth ground.  
Power switch [POWER]  
This is used to turn the power on and off.  
SERVICE switch [NORMAL/SERVICE]  
This switch is used for maintenance purposes.  
For normal operations, select the “NORMALposition.  
LCD CONTRAST adjustment screw  
This is used to adjust the contrast of the LCD display.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-2. Mainframe  
2-2-1. Front panel  
Power supply 1  
Power supply 2  
POWER1  
POWER2  
OFF ON  
OFF  
ON  
POWER1  
ALARM1  
POWER2  
ALARM2  
Multi-format Live Switcher AV-HS450  
Power switch [POWER1, POWER2]  
These are used to turn the power on and off.  
As a standard feature, this mainframe has a redundant power supply system.  
To turn off the power, set the power switches of both system 1 (POWER1) and system 2 (POWER2) to OFF.  
Power indicator [POWER1, POWER2]  
This indicator lights when the power switch ( ) is set to ON while power is supplied to the AC power input  
socket.  
It goes off when the power switch ( ) is set to OFF.  
Alarm indicator [ALARM1, ALARM2]  
These light when the mainframe’s cooling fan has stopped running or when there is a problem (voltage drop)  
in the power supply. When this occurs, an alarm message is displayed on the control panel’s LCD and on the  
OSD screen of the external monitor.  
During the occurrence of an alarm, details of the trouble can be checked using the SYSTEM/Alarm menu.  
The alarm information can be output to an external device from the TALLY/GPI connector ( ) of the mainframe.  
For details, refer to “5-8-2. Alarm message”.  
If the alarm goes off, stop using the unit immediately and be sure to contact your dealer.  
Continuing to use the unit even after the alarm goes off could damage it.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
2-2-2. Rear panel connections area  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
IN1  
IN2  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
TALLY/GPI  
LAN  
PANEL  
   
   
SDI signal input connectors [SDI INPUTS 1 to 16]  
9 to 16: The color collector function can be used.  
13 to 16:The up-converter function can be used.  
Option slot [SLOTA] (IN/OUT A1, IN/OUT A2)  
Option slot [SLOTB] (IN/OUT B1, IN/OUT B2)  
Each of these is an input/output option slot.  
A DVI input board, analog output board or other option board can be installed in these slots.  
For details, refer to “1-3. How to install the option boards” and the operating instructions of the board  
concerned.  
SDI signal output connectors [SDI OUTPUTS 1 to 4]  
1 to 4: These can be allocated by the menus.  
Two sets of the same output signals are distributed from the OUTPUT1 connector.  
DVI-D output connectors [DVI-D OUTPUTS 5, 6]  
These can be allocated by the menus.  
The DVI-I connector cable cannot be used.  
<In the external synchronization mode>  
External synchronization signal input  
Loop-through output  
Reference input connector/BB output  
connector [REF]  
Loop-through output in the external sync mode.  
If the loop-through output is not going to be used,  
provide a 75-ohm termination.  
REF  
BB signals output from both connectors in the internal  
sync mode.  
Input the external synchronization signal to the upper of  
the two connectors shown above.  
PANEL connector [PANEL] (RJ-45) (100 Base-TX)  
Connect this to the control panel using the supplied CAT5E cable (STP, straight, 10 m).  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Functions in each area  
LAN connector [LAN] (RJ-45) (10/100 Base-TX)  
For details on how to connect this connector, refer to “6. External interfaces”.  
EDITOR connector [EDITOR] (RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw  
COM connector [COM] (RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw)  
For details on how to connect this connector, refer to “6. External interfaces”.  
TALLY/GPI input/output connector [TALLY/GPI] (D-sub 50-pin, female, inch screw)  
For details on how to connect this connector, refer to “6. External interfaces”.  
Ground connector [SIGNAL GND]  
Connect to the system’s earth ground.  
AC power input socket [ IN1] [ IN2] (AC 100 V to 120 V, 50/60 Hz)  
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to this socket and the other end to the AC outlet.  
The supplied power cable comes with a 3-pin power plug. Be absolutely sure to plug it into a 3-point power  
outlet as the power source in order to earth the unit securely.  
If a 3-point power outlet is not available for this connection, be absolutely sure to consult your dealer.  
Cooling fan  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-1. Background transition  
3-1-1. Selecting the bus  
Press one of the crosspoint buttons to select the material to be used for the background transition. Depending on  
the operating status, the button pressed will light in one of two colors.  
Lighting in red: When the selected input signals are output to PGM.  
(However, the indicator lights in amber during FTB operations.)  
Lighting in green: When the selected input signals are not output to PGM.  
AUX  
SHIFT  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
SHIFT  
16/32  
1/17  
2/18  
3/19  
4/20  
5/21  
6/22  
7/23  
8/24  
9/25  
10/26  
11/27  
12/28  
13/29  
14/30  
15/31  
Lighting in red  
SHIFT  
Lighting in green  
Furthermore, when one of the crosspoint buttons is held down, the name of the input material and number of the  
button corresponding to the pressed button are displayed on the LCD.  
3-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function  
The SHIFT function enables two materials to be allocated — the front material and the rear material — to one  
button, and the materials to be selected using the [SHIFT] button.  
A total of 32 materials — front materials (1 to 16) and rear materials (17 to 32) — can be allocated to the three  
groups of 16 crosspoint buttons whether these buttons are the PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus  
crosspoint buttons or AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
There are actually two SHIFT functions: “All SHIFT” for switching all the front materials to the rear materials or  
vice versa, and “Single SHIFT” for switching the front material of one crosspoint button with its rear material or  
vice versa.  
“All SHIFT” works once the SHIFT function has been allocated to one of the USER buttons.  
“Single SHIFT” works once the SHIFT function has been allocated to the No.16 or No.1 crosspoint button of the  
crosspoint button group concerned by a menu operation.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
All SHIFT  
All SHIFT is used to switch all the materials of the PGM/A bus crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus crosspoint buttons  
or AUX bus crosspoint buttons from front materials to rear materials or vice versa.  
The USER button to which the SHIFT function has been allocated is used to switch between the front materials  
and rear materials.  
  
Allocate the SHIFT function to one of the USER buttons.  
For the method used to allocate this function to the USER button, refer to “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
  
Each time the [SHIFT] (USER) button is pressed, the front materials are switched to the rear materials or  
vice versa.  
When the rear materials (17 to 32) have been selected, the [SHIFT] (USER) button lights in amber.  
When the button is pressed again, it goes off, and the front materials (1 to 16) are now selected.  
Single SHIFT  
Single SHIFT is used to switch the material of a PGM/A bus crosspoint button, PST/B bus crosspoint button or  
AUX bus crosspoint button from a front material to a rear material or vice versa.  
Switching between the front material and rear material is done using the crosspoint button (No.16 or No.1) in  
which the SHIFT function is allocated.  
Allocating the SHIFT function  
  
Press the [XPT] button to light its indicator, and  
<Menu display>  
display the XPT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
|
|
|
|
XPT  
5 XPT  
Signal Shift  
Sf-Lock  
Off  
XPTAsing|  
—|  
—| Right|  
1~32 IN1~16  
IN-A1  
Left  
Off  
On  
  
Turn [F1] to display the XPTAsing sub menu.  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
IN-B2  
Black  
CBGD  
CBAR  
FMEM1~4  
1
4
2
3
6
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE  
IMAGE  
A
B
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
5
PGM  
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
AMBER:1  
DSK 1/2  
GREEN :2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
/
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
PVW  
SHIFT  
CLN  
MV1  
MV2  
None  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
SHIFT  
1/17  
2/18  
3/19  
4/20  
5/21  
6/22  
7/23  
8/24  
9/25  
10/26  
11/27  
12/28  
13/29  
14/30  
15/31  
16/32  
SHIFT  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
  
Turn [F4] to select the button to which the SHIFT function is to be allocated using the Shift item.  
Right: Button No.16  
Left: Button No.1  
Off: Function is not allocated.  
  
Turn [F5] to select the operation to be performed when the [SHIFT] button is pressed using the Sf-Lock item.  
Off:The rear material is selected only while the [SHIFT] button is pressed.  
On: The front material and rear material are switched each time the [SHIFT] button is pressed.  
To use the materials that have been set in the button to which the SHIFT function is allocated, either set the  
SHIFT function off or allocate the SHIFT function to another button.  
If a rear material has been selected regardless of whether the Sf-Lock item is On or Off, both the button  
concerned and the [SHIFT] button will light in amber.  
When PGM/PST is selected as the bus mode setting or when the bus has been switched by a transition, the  
SHIFT status will also be switched.  
If the [SHIFT] button for “Single SHIFT” is pressed when the rear materials (17 to 32) have been selected  
using “All SHIFT”, the bus crosspoint buttons concerned will be switched to the front materials.  
When a crosspoint button is held down, the input material allocated to the pressed button is displayed on the  
LCD.  
When the [SHIFT] button is held down, “Shift” is displayed on the LCD.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-1-3. Selecting the bus mode  
Select the A/B bus system or flip-flop system (PGM/PST system) from the setting menu.  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator, and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2], and select the A/B or PGM/PST (flip-flop system) using the BusMode item.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CONFIG 1 BusMode LCD-BL MENUDLG  
Operate |PGM/PST|  
A/B  
On|  
On|  
Off  
Off  
60  
120  
180  
With the flip-flop system (PGM/PST), the PGM/A bus selected signals are always output as PGM images, and the  
PST/B bus selected signals are always output as PVW (PST) images.  
System  
A/B  
Video output  
PGM  
PVW (PST)  
Before transition  
PGM/A  
During transition  
PGM/A, PST/B  
PST/B  
After transition completion  
PST/B  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
With an A B transition  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
1/17  
2/18  
1/17  
2/18  
1/17  
2/18  
Lighting in red  
Lighting in green  
System  
Flip-flop  
PGM/PST  
Video output  
PGM  
PVW (PST)  
Before transition  
PGM/A  
During transition  
PGM/A, PST/B  
PST/B  
After transition completion  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
PST/B  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
1/17  
2/18  
1/17  
2/18  
1/17  
2/18  
Lighting in red  
Lighting in green  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-1-4. Selecting the transition mode  
Press the [BKGD] button in the transition area so that its indicator lights in amber.  
When the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button are pressed at the same time, both buttons are selected.  
Use the [MIX] and [WIPE] buttons in the transition area to select the background transition mode.  
The indicator of the selected button lights in amber.  
3-1-5. Manual transition (using the fader lever)  
Operate the fader lever to execute transitions manually.  
If the fader lever has been operated during auto transition, auto transition will be switched to manual operation as  
soon as the fader position overtakes the amount of the transition being executed.  
The bus tally LEDs on the left of the fader lever indicate the program bus output status.  
Top LED only lights:  
PGM/A bus output  
Top and bottom LEDs light: during the transition  
Bottom LED only lights:  
PST/B output  
3-1-6. Auto transition  
When the [AUTO] button is pressed, the transition is executed automatically using the transition time which has  
been set.  
When the [AUTO] button is pressed while the fader lever is at an interim setting, the transition is executed in the  
time remaining from the interim setting.  
The auto transition time is set using the TIME menu.  
  
Press the [TIME] button to light its indicator, and display the TIME menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the BKGD sub menu.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the display unit using the Unit item.  
  
When frames (Frame) have been selected as the unit, turn [F3] to set the transition time.  
  
When seconds (Sec) have been selected as the unit, turn [F2] to set the second units or [F3] to set the  
frame units.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
TIME  
BKGD  
1 TransTime  
16s|  
Unit  
|
39f|  
Sec|  
|
|
|
TIME  
BKGD  
1 TransTime  
|
Unit  
999f| Frame|  
Any time from 0 to 999f can be set. The time which can be set when seconds are used as the display unit differs  
depending on the video format.  
59.94i: max. 33s09f, 59.94p: max. 16s39f, 50i: max. 39s24f, 50p: max. 19s49f,  
24psf: max 41s15f, 23.98psf: max 41s15f  
3-1-7. Cut transition  
When the [CUT] button is pressed, the transition is executed instantly.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-2. IMAGE  
3-2-1. Setting the IMAGE effects  
Three effects — paint, mono-color, mosaic and defocus — can be set for the PGM/A bus materials and PST/B  
bus materials.  
  
Press the [IMAGE A] button (or the [IMAGE B] button) to light its indicator, and display the IMAGE A (or  
IMAGE B) menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F2], and set the IMAGE effect to On or Off.  
To add the IMAGE effect, set to On.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
IMAG A 1 On/Off  
IMAG A |  
Off|  
On  
  
Turn [F1] to display the menu (Paint, Mono, Mosa/Def sub menu) of the effect that is to be set.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
IMAG A 2 On/Off Y-Level C-Level  
Paint  
|
Off|  
0|  
0|  
0~7  
On  
0~7  
|
|
|
|
IMAG A 3 On/Off Hue  
Sat  
Mono  
|
Off|  
0.0|  
0.0|  
On  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
359.9 100.0  
|
|
|
|
IMAG A 4 On/Off Mode  
Effect  
Mosa/Def|  
Off|Mosaic |  
20.0|  
On Defocus  
0.0  
|
100.0  
  
Turn [F2], and set On or Off using the sub menu concerned.  
  
Turn [F3] and [F4], and change the effect setting.  
Executing the transition when the PGM/PST (flip-flop system) is selected in the BusMode item of the Operate  
submenu of the CONFIG menu replaces the PGM/A bus with the PST/B bus, and the menu title “IMAG A” is  
also replaced with “IMAG B”.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-2-2. Executing the IMAGE effect  
While the IMAGE effect is set to On, the crosspoint button with the bus material to which the IMAGE effect has  
been added now blinks.  
The IMAGE effects are created as DVEs (digital video effects) so their output is delayed by one frame from the  
normal output.  
Even when the IMAGE effect has been set to On only for the PGM/A bus or PST/B bus, the effects of both buses  
will be output with a 1-frame delay.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
PAGE  
3-3. Wipe  
1
4
7
2
3
WIPE  
SQ1 SQ2  
1
4
7
2
5
3
3-3-1. Selecting the wipe pattern  
Based on the wipe patterns allocated to 12 buttons, this unit has 7 pages  
of background transition patterns and 4 pages of key transition patterns.  
(Refer to “Table of wipe patterns”.)  
The images and number of the basic wipe patterns are displayed on the  
wipe pattern selector buttons.  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
BKGD  
PATT  
8
9
8
9
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
<How to select the wipe patterns>  
  
Press the [BKGD PATT] button or [KEY PATT] button to select the pattern page.  
Each time the button is pressed, the page is switched, and the selected PAGE LED lights.  
Type of transition  
Background  
Pattern page selection  
PAGE LED lighting  
[BKGD PATT] button  
WIPE SQ1 SL1 3D1 SQ2 SL2 3D2  
  
Key  
[KEY PATT] button  
WIPE SQ1 SL1 3D1  
  
  
Select the button from among the 12 wipe pattern selector buttons for which the number of the pattern  
concerned is indicated.  
The selected pattern lights, and a wipe pattern image appears on the external monitor (OSD).  
The pattern page indicator LEDs light only when the [BKGD PATT] button or [KEY PATT] button has been  
selected.  
Table of wipe patterns  
Key transition pattern pages  
WIPE  
SQ1 (squeeze 1)  
SL1 (slide 1)  
3D1 (3 dimensions 1)  
1
2
5
8
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
SQ  
SQ  
SQ SL  
SL  
SL  
SL  
SL  
4
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
SQ  
SQ  
SL  
SQ  
7
9
7
8
9
7
8
9
7
8
9
SQ  
10  
SQ  
SQ SL  
SL  
10  
11  
12  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
No  
No  
No  
No  
SQ  
SQ  
pattern  
pattern pattern pattern  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Background transition pattern pages  
WIPE  
SQ2 (squeeze 2)  
SL2 (slide 2)  
3D2 (3 dimensions 2)  
1
2
5
8
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
SQ  
SQ  
SQ  
SQ SL  
SL  
SL  
SL  
SL  
4
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
No  
SQ  
SL  
SQ  
pattern  
7
9
7
8
9
7
8
9
7
8
9
SQ  
10  
SQ  
SQ SL  
SL  
10  
11  
12  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
No  
No  
No  
No  
SQ  
SQ  
pattern  
pattern pattern pattern  
SQ2 (squeeze 2)  
SL2 (slide 2)  
3D2 (3 dimensions 2)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
No  
pattern  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
pattern  
SQ  
SQ  
SL  
SL  
pattern pattern  
pattern pattern  
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
7
5
6
No  
No  
No  
pattern  
SQ SQ  
SL SL  
SL SL  
pattern SQ SQ  
pattern  
7
8
9
7
8
9
8
9
No  
pattern  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
pattern  
SQ  
SQ  
SL  
SL  
pattern pattern  
pattern pattern  
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern pattern  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-3-2. Selecting the background for the 3D2 pattern page  
On the 3D2 (3 dimensions 2) pattern page, a still image in one of the frame memories (FMEM1-4), color  
background (CBGG) or Black can be selected for the background.  
  
Press the [BKGD] button to light its indicator, and display the BKGD menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Base sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
BKGD  
Base  
6 Type  
| Black|  
FMEM1  
|
FMEM4  
CBGD  
  
Turn [F2] to set the image to be used for the background using the Type item.  
The background that has been set takes effect when “3D2” is selected on the pattern page of the background  
transitions.  
3-3-3. Selecting the wipe direction  
Operate the wipe direction selector buttons to select the wipe direction for the background transition.  
(The key transitions are set by the menu. The direction which is set here will not be reflected. See “3-4-3. Key  
transitions”.)  
When the [R] indicator is off:  
Wiping proceeds in the normal direction.  
When the [R] indicator is lighted:  
Wiping proceeds in the reverse direction.  
A
N
R
N/R  
A
When the [N/R] indicator is lighted:  
The normal direction is replaced with the reverse  
direction (or vice versa) when the transition is  
completed.  
A
B
A
B
A
A
B
B
A
(The lighted and extinguished statuses of the [R]  
button are also switched in line with the direction of the  
wiping.)  
B
B
A
B
B
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-3-4. Wipe decorations (border, soft effect)  
A border effect or soft effect can be added to the wiping of background transitions.  
Setting the border and soft effect  
  
Press the [BKGD] button to light its indicator, and display the BKGD menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Soft  
BKGD  
1 Border  
Width  
Border |  
Off|  
5.0|  
0.0|  
On  
0.1  
|
0.0  
|
100.0 100.0  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Border sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the Border item.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft item.  
When “On” has been selected as the Border item setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is  
indicated as the amount of soft effect.  
When only the soft effect is to be added to wipe, select “Off” as the Border item setting.  
Setting the border color  
  
On the BKGD menu, turn [F1] to display the BodrCol sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
BKGD  
2 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
0.0| 100.0| White  
BodrCol |  
0.0|  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 Yellow  
Cyan  
|
359.9 100.0 108.0 Green  
Magenta  
Red  
Blue  
Black  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the border color.  
To call the preset color  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5] switch.  
The Hue, Sat and Lum values are changed to the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset color, refer to “3-10. Preset memory”.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-3-5. Setting the wipe start position  
Any start position can be set for WIPE patterns No.5 and No.11 and for SQ pattern No.5 among the wipe patterns.  
For WIPE patterns No.5 and No.11, the position is set using the WIPEPos sub menu of the BKGD menu.  
For SQ pattern No.5, it is set using the SQPos sub menu of the BKGD menu.  
  
Press the [BKGD] button to light its indicator, and display the BKGD menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the WIPEPos sub menu or the SQPos sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
BKGD  
3 X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
0.00| 0.00|  
-100.0 -100.0  
CopyTo↓  
WIPEPos |  
|
|
100.0 100.0  
|
|
|
|
|
BKGD  
SQPos  
4 X-Pos  
0.00|  
-100.0 -100.0  
Y-Pos  
CopyTo↓  
|
0.00|  
|
|
100.0 100.0  
  
Either operate the positioners or turn [F2] and [F3] to set the wipe start position using the X-Pos item and  
Y-Pos item.  
These settings can be established only when WIPE or SQ #5 has been selected as the background pattern  
or key pattern.  
  
Either operate the fader lever or press the [AUTO] button to check the wipe operation.  
(When, for instance, –50 has been set for X-Pos and –50 for Y-Pos, the following screen (or key) appears  
from the bottom left and wipe is performed while the screen (or key) moves to the screen center.)  
<X-Pos,Y-Pos setting range>  
Inside screen area  
Outside screen area  
  
To copy the start position settings, press [F5].  
The copy destination appears under the CopyTo item. (It will not change even if [F5] is turned.)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-3-6. Modifying wipe  
Setting the lighting effect  
Lighting effects can be added when the following wipe patterns have been selected:  
3D1 page: #1, #3, #7, #9  
These effects can be set for background transitions and key transitions.  
For background transitions  
  
Press the [BKGD] button to light its indicator, and display the BKGD menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Modify sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
4:3Auto  
BKGD  
5 Light  
Trim  
Modify |  
Off|  
Off|  
Off|  
On  
16:9  
4:3  
4:3Smth  
On  
  
Turn [F2] to select whether the lighting effect at the time a background transition is executed is to be added  
using the Light item.  
On: The lighting effect is added.  
Off:The lighting effect is not added.  
For key transitions  
  
Press the [KEY] button to light its indicator, and display the KEY menu.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Modify sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
KEY  
9 Light  
Modify |  
Off|  
On  
  
Turn [F2] to select whether the lighting effect at the time a key transition is executed is to be added using the  
Light item.  
On: The lighting effect is added.  
Off:The lighting effect is not added.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Setting the trimming  
When SQ1, SQ2, SL1, SL2, 3D1 or 3D2 has been selected as the wipe pattern, the trimming at the time a  
background transition is executed can be set.  
The “4:3” and “4:3Smth” settings for the Trim item take effect when the HD format has been selected as the  
system format setting.  
  
On the BKGD menu, turn [F1] to display the Modify sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
4:3Auto  
BKGD  
5 Light  
Trim  
Modify |  
Off|  
Off|  
Off|  
On  
16:9  
4:3  
4:3Smth  
On  
  
Turn [F3] to set the trimming operation and transition operation using the Trim item.  
16:9 (On): For trimming the edges around the material.  
This setting is used when a black border, for instance, can be seen around the material.  
When HD has been selected as the system format setting, “16:9” is displayed on the menu,  
but when SD has been selected as the system format setting, “On” is displayed on the menu.  
4:3:  
For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and releasing the trimming when the transition is  
completed.  
4:3Smth: For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and executing the transition to 16:9 images smoothly.  
Off: No trimming  
  
Turn [F4] to select the setting for automatic trimming (4:3 or 4:3Smth) in accordance with the material using  
the 4:3Auto item.  
Off:All input materials are targeted for automatic trimming.  
On: Using the up-converter setting, the input materials for which EC (edge crop) is selected are targeted  
for automatic trimming.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4. Key  
This operation combines the background image with another image. The key definition can be adjusted, and an  
edge can be added to the combined image.  
Also available as materials besides KEY for combining with the background image are PinP (picture in picture)  
and DSK (downstream key). The figure below shows their priorities.  
<Key, PinP and DSK priorities>  
Background image  
KEY  
PinP  
DSK  
How key combinations work is shown in the figure below.  
<How key composition works>  
Background  
HS450  
Output image  
Invert  
Key source  
HS450  
Key fill  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-1. Selecting the key type  
  
Press the [KEY] button to light its indicator, and display the KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the KEY sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select the Type item.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
KEY  
KEY  
1 Type  
LumKey Fill  
PVW  
| Linear|ChrmOff|  
Bus|  
Auto  
Lum ChrmOn Matte  
Chroma  
Full  
Off  
On  
Lum (luminance key/self key):  
This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component or luminance and chroma  
component of the key fill signal.  
Linear (linear key/EXT key):  
This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key source signal.  
It is used when the key source signal and key fill signal are different.  
Chroma (chroma key/self key):  
This is for creating the key signals using a specific hue of the key fill signal as the reference.  
Full (full key/self key):  
This is for creating the key signals using the images on the full screen as the key source signals.  
PinP combinations are possible in conjunction with the flying key. See “3-4-9. Flying key”.  
Since the luminance and chroma keys are operated as self keys, the key fill signals are used as the key  
source signals. For the full key, the images on the full screen are used as the key source signals.  
When the luminance key, chroma key or full key has been selected as the key type, the key signals will  
remain unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.  
When using the linear key, use material with a black background and white characters or shape to be  
combined by the key as the key source signal. Material which is not black and white may not be combined  
clearly.  
Material with a white background and black characters, etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for  
use.  
  
When the luminance key has been selected, the chroma component can be included in the generation of the  
key signals in view of the self key application. (This does not apply to the linear key.)  
Turn [F3], and select the setting using the LumKey item.  
ChrmOn: In addition to the luminance component, the chroma component is also taken into account in  
the generation of the key signals.  
This is the setting for using a color with a low luminance component for the key signals (such  
as when defining blue characters).  
ChrmOff: The key signals are generated from only the luminance component.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.  
Bus: The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.  
Matte: The internal fill matte is used for the key fill signal.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-2. Selecting the key material  
Selecting the key fill signal  
Press the [KEY] button among the AUX bus selector buttons to light its indicator, and press one of the AUX bus  
crosspoint buttons 1 to 32 to select the key fill signal.  
Selecting the key source signal  
On the CONFIG menu, set the key source for key fill.  
This setting is the same for KEY and DSK.  
Setting with AUX bus crosspoint buttons  
  
Press the [KEY] button (or [DSK 1/2] buttons) of the AUX bus selector buttons to light its indicator, and hold  
down the AUX bus crosspoint button for the selected key fill signal.  
<Menu display>  
|
XPTStats FILL: INPUT1  
SRC↓ INPUT1  
| XPT : 1  
  
Turn the [F5] and select a key source signal (SRC) for the key fill signal (FILL), and press the [F5] switch.  
Setting in the CONFIG menu  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator, and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the KSAsign sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG11 Fill  
Source↓  
—|  
KSAsign |  
—|  
IN1~16 IN1~16  
IN-A1 IN-A1  
IN-A2 IN-A2  
IN-B1 IN-B1  
IN-B2 IN-B2  
CBGD  
CBAR  
CBGD  
CBAR  
FMEM1~4 FMEM1~4  
NoAsign  
  
Turn [F2] to select the key fill material using the Fill item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the key source material using the Source item, and press the [F3] switch.  
The luminance and chroma keys are used as self keys so the key fill signal can be used as the key source  
signal regardless of the menu setting.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
MIX  
WIPE  
3-4-3. Key transitions  
  
Select the transition mode.  
BKGD  
MIX  
KEY  
Press the [KEY] button in the transition area to light its indicator.  
To execute a background transition and key transition at the same  
time, press the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button together to turn  
on both indicators.  
ON  
WIPE  
  
Select the transition type.  
PAGE  
1
4
7
2
3
Use the [MIX] button or [WIPE] button in the transition area to  
select the key transition mode.  
WIPE  
SQ1 SQ2  
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
The selected button lights in amber, and the MIX or WIPE status  
indicator LED depending on the selected mode lights.  
If WIPE has been selected, press the [KEY PATT] button in the  
wipe pattern/memory area to light its indicator, and select the wipe  
pattern.  
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
BKGD  
PATT  
8
9
8
9
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
  
Set the time of the transition.  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
On the TIME menu, turn [F1] to display the KEY sub menu.  
As with a background transition, set the transition time.  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
  
Set the wipe direction.  
On the KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the Trans sub menu.  
Turn [F1] to set Nor (normal) or Rev (reverse) using the OutPatt item.  
Nor (normal): The key out pattern moves in the same direction as the key in pattern.  
Rev (reverse): The key out pattern moves in the opposite direction from the key in pattern.  
<Pattern examples>  
Pattern example 4  
(SQ5, 10, 12)  
(3D 1 to 5, 10, 11, 12)  
Pattern example 3  
(WIPE5, 10, 11, 12)  
Pattern example 1 Pattern example 2  
Key in  
SQ  
SQ  
Key out  
(Normal)  
SQ  
SQ  
SQ  
Key out  
(Reverse)  
SQ  
: This indicates the areas where keys are combined.  
The operations shown in pattern example 3 are performed for WIPE 5, 10, 11 and 12.  
The operations shown in pattern example 4 are performed for SQ 5, 10 and 12 and for 3D1 5, 10, 11 and 12,  
and the same operations are performed for normal and reverse.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
  
Execute the transition.  
Press the [AUTO] button in the transition area to automatically execute the transition at the transition time  
that has been set.  
Alternatively, execute the transition manually by operating the fader lever.  
Key auto transition  
When the [KEY ON] button in the transition area is pressed, the transition is automatically executed at the  
transition time that has been set.  
During key in, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button blinks in red, and it lights in red when the transition is  
completed.  
If the [KEY ON] button is pressed with the picture completely keyed in, the Key image transition (key out) is  
executed.  
During key out, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button lights in red, and it goes off when the transition is  
completed.  
If the [KEY ON] button is pressed during the transition, the transition direction is reversed.  
3-4-4. Key preview  
Key preview images can be output to the preview output, and the keys can be adjusted and checked.  
  
On the KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the KEY sub menu.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the preview mode using the PVW item.  
On: An image with key effects added is output to the preview output.  
Off: An image with no key effects added is output to the preview output.  
Auto: The preview image of the next transition is output to the preview output.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-5. Adjusting the luminance key and linear key  
These steps are taken to adjust the luminance key and linear key definition.  
  
Press the [KEY/CKEY] button to light its indicator, and display the KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
KEY  
2 Clip  
Gain  
Density Invert  
Off  
Adjust |  
0.0| 100.0| 100.0|  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the key definition.  
  
Turn [F5] to set key invert.  
When On is selected, the key signals to be generated internally are inverted.  
Operation  
Parameter  
Description of setting  
Setting range  
Reference level for generating  
key signals  
F2  
Clip  
0.0 to 108.0  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Gain  
Key amplitude  
Key density  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
On, Off  
Density  
Invert  
Key signal inversion  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-6. Adjusting the chroma key  
Sampling is executed for the selected key materials to adjust those aspects of the key that are to be compensated.  
Step 1  
<Menu display>  
To execute the sampling automatically  
  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 1 AutCmp↓  
RESET↓  
Press the [KEY/CKEY] button to light its indicator, and  
AutoCmp |  
display the CHR KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the AutoCmp sub menu.  
  
Press [F2] to execute the sampling automatically.  
To undo what has been sampled, press [F5].  
<Menu display>  
To execute the sampling manually  
  
Press the [KEY/CKEY] button to light its indicator, and  
display the CHR KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
|
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 2 View  
Mode  
UNDO↓  
Sample1 | Cmpsit| SelBG|  
Matte Cln.BG  
Proc.FG Cln.FG  
FG Spl.Spg  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Sample1 sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Cmpsit” using the View item.  
Cmpsit: Composite image that combines the background image and key  
Matte: Matte image  
Proc.FG: Process foreground image  
FG: Foreground image  
  
Turn [F3] to select “SelBG” using the Mode item.  
SelBG: A color for the background of the foreground image is specified.  
Normally, either a blue or green background is specified.  
Cln.BG: The noise in the background image is removed.  
Cln.FG: The noise in the foreground image is removed.  
Spl.Spg: The noise remaining in the detailed areas is removed.  
  
Use the positioner to move the position of the sample marker.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].  
  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The area that has been set is now sampled.  
  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Step 2  
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the background image.  
The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.  
  
On the CHR KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the Sample1 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 2 View  
Mode  
UNDO↓  
Sample1 | Matte| Cln.BG|  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Matte” using the View item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select “Cln.BG” using the Mode item.  
  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the noise (white dots) in the  
background image.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].  
  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.  
  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
Before the noise is removed  
After the noise is removed  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Step 3  
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the foreground image.  
The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Matte” using the View item.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 2 View  
Mode  
UNDO↓  
Sample1 | Matte| Cln.FG|  
  
Turn [F3] to select “Cln.FG” using the Mode item.  
  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the noise (white dots) in the  
foreground image.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].  
  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.  
  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
Before the noise is removed  
After the noise is removed  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Step 4  
After steps 1 to 3 have been carried out, noise will still  
remain in the detail areas such as the subject's hair as  
shown in the image on the right.  
If there are many areas with noise, the noise is removed by  
carrying out this step several times.  
If there are few areas with noise, adjust the noise using the  
Spill(+) item and Spill(-) item of the Sample2 sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Cmpsit” using the View item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select “Spl.Spg” using the Mode item.  
<Menu display>  
CHRKEY 2 View  
|
|
|
|
|
Mode  
UNDO↓  
Sample1 | Cmpsit|Spl.Spg|  
  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position of the remaining noise.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].  
  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed, and the colors become more natural.  
  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
Execute sampling in both the light and dark areas as the sample area.  
If the noise in the foreground image is not completely removed by carrying out the steps above, proceed with  
the FineTun sub menu operation.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Step 5  
The objective of this step is to finely adjust the image by adjusting the noise and transparency, for example.  
  
On the CHR KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the Sample2 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 3 View  
Mode  
UNDO↓  
Sample2 | Cmpsit| Spill-|  
Matte Spill+  
Proc.FG Matte-  
FG Matte+  
Detail-  
Detail+  
MatSpng  
MkFGTrn  
RstrDtl  
  
Turn [F2] to select the image to be adjusted using the View item.  
Cmpsit: Composite image that combines the background image and key  
Matte:  
Proc.FG: Process foreground image  
FG: Foreground image  
Matte image  
  
Turn [F3] to select the adjustment function using the Mode item.  
For details on the items, refer to the following pages.  
  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample marker to the position to be sampled.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary encoder [Z].  
  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable, press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The area that has been set is now sampled.  
  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one only.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
[Spill–] [Spill+]  
In these modes, the noise in the foreground image can be removed or restored step by step through repeated  
sampling.  
[+]  
Spill  
[–]  
[Matte–] [Matte+]  
In these modes, the matte information is adjusted.  
If, for instance, the area of shadow in the foreground image is to be made lighter, use [Matte-] to adjust.  
Conversely, to make it darker, use [Matte+].  
Transparent images such as images of smoke or water can be made to stand out more.  
[–]  
Matte  
[+]  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
[Detail–] [Detail+]  
In these modes, the noise in the background image can be removed step by step.  
This is a useful way of adjusting images lost by other sampling operations to adjust the texture or transparency  
of images.  
[–]  
Detail  
[+]  
[MatSpng]  
In this mode, the semi-transparent parts of the subject in a foreground image are selected and made matte  
(non-transparent). Unlike [Cln.FG] on the Sample1 sub menu, the color information is not changed in the  
process.  
With [Cln.FG], the colors of the selected parts are restored to their original colors but, with [MatSpng], only the  
semi-transparent keys are made matte (non-transparent) while the colors remain unchanged and the original  
colors are not restored.  
[MkFGTrn]  
In this mode, the transparency of areas with a low transparency in the foreground image is increased.  
This is useful when, for instance, areas covered with dark smoke or clouds in a foreground image are to be  
made semi-transparent.  
[RstrDtl]  
In this mode, the transparency of areas with a high transparency in the background image is reduced.  
This is useful when, for instance, restoring the details of an image (such as an image with a subject who has  
loose hair or an image with smoke), which have been lost as a result of a [ClnBG] or other such operation on  
the Sample1 sub menu, to what they were in the original image.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
[FineTun]  
In this mode, detailed images can be adjusted.  
  
On the CHR KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the FineTun sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CHRKEY 4 View  
Spill  
Trans  
Detail  
FineTun | Cmpsit|  
0|  
0|  
0
  
Turn [F2] to select [Cmpsit] using the View item.  
  
Turn [F3] to remove or restore the noise using the Spill item.  
When it is turned clockwise, a large amount of noise is removed from the foreground image, and the image  
colors increasingly approach the complementary color (opposite color) of the blue screen.  
When it is turned counterclockwise, the image colors approach the colors of the original foreground image.  
  
By turning [F4] clockwise, the matte of the colors closely resembling the colors of the foreground image can  
be adjusted using the Trans item.  
This is useful when, for instance, making the parts covered by dark smoke, clouds or other such objects in  
the foreground image semi-transparent.  
  
By turning [F5] clockwise, the matte information for the colors closely resembling the colors of the  
background image can be adjusted using the Detail item.  
This is useful when, for instance, restoring the details of an image (such as an image with a subject who has  
loose hair or an image with smoke), which have been lost in the foreground image as a result of sampling, to  
what they were in the original image.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-7. Key decorations  
A border, shadow or other edge can be added to the key.  
Setting the key edge  
  
Press the [KEY] button to light its indicator and  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
KEY  
4 Type  
Width  
Direc  
display the KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
Edge  
|
Off|  
2|  
0|  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Edge sub menu.  
Border  
Drop  
0~4  
45  
90  
Shadow  
Outline  
135  
180  
225  
270  
315  
  
Turn [F2] to select the edge type.  
Off: An edge is not added.  
Border: A border is added around the entire edge.  
Drop: A diagonal border is added.  
Shadow: A shadow is added.  
Outline: An outline (only a border with no fill) is added.  
Border  
Shadow  
Outline  
Drop  
  
Turn [F3] to set the edge width.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the direction (in 45-degree increments) in which “Drop” and “Shadow” will be added.  
(Top)  
180  
135  
90  
225  
270  
315  
0
(Left)  
(Right)  
45  
(Bottom)  
Setting the edge color  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
KEY  
5 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
0.0| 100.0| Black  
  
On the KEY menu, turn [F1] to display the EdgeCol  
sub menu.  
EdgeCol |  
0.0|  
  
Turn [F2] ,[F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and  
Lum of the edge color.  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 White  
| Yellow  
359.9 100.0 108.0  
Cyan  
Green  
Magenta  
Red  
To call the preset color  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the  
[F5] switch.  
The Hue, Sat and Lum values are changed to the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset color,  
refer to “3-10. Memory”.  
Blue  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-8. Masking the key signals  
These steps are taken to mask the key signals using the mask signal of the box pattern.  
  
Press the [KEY] button to light its indicator and display the KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
KEY  
Mask  
10 Mask  
Invert  
|
Off|  
Off|  
Manual  
4:3  
On  
  
Turn [F2], and select the masking method using the Mask item.  
Off: The key signals are not masked.  
Manual: The area that is set using the MaskAdj sub menu is masked.  
4:3: The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect ratio.  
  
Turn [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using the Invert item.  
On: The mask signal is inverted.  
Off: The mask signal is not inverted.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the MaskAdj sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
KEY  
11 Left  
Top  
Bottom Right  
MaskAdj | −25.00| 25.00| −25.00| 25.00  
  
Turn [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.  
Operation  
F2  
Parameter  
Left  
Description of setting  
Key left position  
Setting range  
−50.00 to 50.00  
Initial value  
−25.00  
25.00  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Top  
Key top position  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
Bottom  
Right  
Key bottom position  
Key right position  
−25.00  
25.00  
The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot  
exceed the Bottom setting (and vice versa).  
<Key mask setting> (figure shows the default values)  
Area masked  
50  
TOP (25)  
Area where the key signal is  
effective  
0
BOTTOM (-25)  
-50  
Video signal range  
(-25)  
LEFT  
(25)  
RIGHT  
-50  
0
50  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-4-9. Flying key  
Using DVE effects, this key enables the key signals that have been input to be moved, expanded or contracted.  
In order for the flying key to take effect, select SL #5 as the key transition.  
When the key transition is executed, the keys are combined by the key signals set using the flying key menu.  
(The transition effect is fixed at MIX.)  
Since the flying key uses DVE effects, the image is delayed by one frame.  
  
Press the [KEY] button to light its indicator and display the KEY menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the FlyKEY sub menu.  
(It is also possible to display the FlyKEY sub menu directly without displaying the KEY menu in step  
double-clicking the SL No.5 button.)  
by  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
Size  
|
KEY  
8 X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
0.00| 0.00| 100.0|  
-100.00 -100.00  
FlyKEY |  
0.0  
|
|
|
100.00 100.00 400.0  
  
Turn [F2] to set the X coordinate of the key signal using the X-Pos item.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the Y coordinate of the key signal using the Y-Pos item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the key signal change size (max. 400: 400 %) using the Size item.  
ABC  
ABC  
Key signal  
When combined using  
the flying key  
In order to add the edge of the key before the DVE effect, the thickness of the edge is also changed when the  
size is changed.  
PinP combinations using the flying key  
When “Full” is selected using the Type item in “3-4-1. Selecting the key type”, PinP combinations can be  
performed using the flying key.  
(At this point in time, the Clip item and Gain item cannot be set on the Adjust sub menu.)  
With the full key, the image on the full screen serves as the key source signal so an edge will not be added  
unless a further step is taken.  
To add an edge, mask the key signals so that the key source signals are made smaller than the entire screen.  
For details on masking, refer to “3-4-8. Masking the key signals”.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5. PinP (picture in picture)  
Another image can be combined with the background image.  
This unit supports two PinP channels.  
3-5-1. Selecting the PinP channel and material  
Press the [PinP 1/2] button among the AUX bus selector buttons.  
When the button is lighted in amber, the PinP1 sub menu is displayed on the LCD, and the state in which the  
PinP1 materials are selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
When the button is lighted in green, the PinP2 sub menu is displayed on the LCD, and the state in which the  
PinP2 materials are selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
The selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber. (It will light in red if the selected signal is a PGM output  
signal.)  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
PinP1 1 Shape  
PinP1  
CrclAsp Density PVW  
0.0| 100.0|  
| Square|  
Off  
On  
Circle  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
100.0 100.0  
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE A  
IMAGE B  
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
4
5
6
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
DSK 1/2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
AMBER:1 / GREEN :2  
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
SHIFT  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5-2. Selecting Shape  
Square or Circle can be selected as the shape used for combining PinP1 images.  
PinP2 images are fixed as Square.  
  
Press the [PinP1/PinP2] button to light its indicator and display the PinP1 menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
HD: 16 : 9  
SD: 4 : 3  
PinP1 1 Shape  
PinP1  
CrclAsp Density PVW  
0.0| 100.0|  
| Square|  
Off  
On  
Circle  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
100.0 100.0  
0 %  
100 %  
  
Turn [F2] and, using the Shape item, select the shape used for combining images.  
When Circle has been selected using the Shape item, turn [F3] to change the aspect ratio of the circle using  
the CrclAsp item.  
When Square has been selected using the Shape item, “—” is displayed for the CrclAsp item.  
  
Turn [F4] to adjust the transmissivity (darkness) applying when the images are combined using the Density  
item.  
3-5-3. PinP preview  
Select whether to output the PinP1 and PinP2 preview images to the preview output.  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), turn [F5] to set the PVW item.  
Settings for the PVW item are the same for both PinP1 and PinP2.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
PinP1 1 Shape  
PinP1  
CrclAsp Density PVW  
0.0| 100.0|  
| Square|  
Off  
On  
Circle  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
100.0 100.0  
On: An image with the PinP1 and PinP2 effect added is output to the preview output.  
Off: An image without the PinP1 and PinP2 effect added is output to the preview output.  
The PVW On and Off settings can be allocated to the user buttons.  
Refer to “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5-4. PinP transitions  
  
Set the transition time.  
On the TIME menu, turn [F1] to display the PinP1 sub menu (or PinP2 sub menu).  
As with background transitions, set the transition time.  
Refer to “3-1-6. Auto transition”.  
  
When the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) in the transition area is pressed, the PinP1 image (or  
PinP2 image) transitions (fades in) for the length of the transition time that has been set.  
During fade-in, the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) blinks in red, and when the transition is  
completed, it lights in red.  
When the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) is pressed after fade-in is completed, the PinP1 image  
(or PinP2 image) transitions (fades out).  
During fade-out, the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) lights in red, and when the transition is  
completed, it goes off.  
If the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) is pressed at any point during a transition, the direction of  
the transition is reversed.  
3-5-5. PinP adjustments  
Adjusting the PinP position and size  
While the PinP menu is selected, adjust the X and Y coordinates using the positioner in the positioner area,  
and adjust the size using the rotary encoder [Z]. Alternatively, the settings can be performed on the menus.  
  
Press the [PinP1] button (or [PinP2] button) to light its indicator and display the PinP1 menu (or PinP2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Position sub menu.  
  
Either operate the positioner and the rotary encoder [Z] or turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to set the X and Y  
coordinates and the size using the X-Pos, Y-Pos and Size items.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
Size  
0.00| 25.00|  
|
PinP1 4 X-Pos  
Position| 0.00|  
-50.00 -50.00  
Y-Pos  
0.00  
|
|
|
50.00 50.00 100.00  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Adjusting the rotation angle  
  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), turn [F1] to display the Rotation sub menu.  
  
Either operate the positioner and rotary encoder [Z] or turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to set the X rotation, Y rotation  
and Z rotation.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
PinP1 5 X  
Y
Z
Rotation|  
0|  
0|  
0|  
-360  
-360  
-360  
|
|
|
+360  
+360  
+360  
Select the dot by dot mode  
When the system is set to the HD mode and an SD format image is to be used for the PinP material, the  
images can be combined in the dot by dot mode (actual-size images).  
In this mode, the SD format image will not be up-converted so image deterioration can be prevented.  
Furthermore, since the images are handled in their actual size, the PinP size is fixed.  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN1 to IN16, A1, A2, B1, B2)  
Select the PinP material input for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of FS.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CC  
INPUT XX FS  
| 1/13 |  
FS  
Mode↓  
On| Normal|  
Off  
On  
Off  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
  
Turn [F4] to select DbyD using the Mode item, and press the [F4] switch to enter the selection.  
SD  
HD  
PinP material  
SD  
PinP combined image  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5-6. Linking PinP1 and PinP2  
The PinP1 and PinP2 images perform a symmetrical operation for the axis whose coordinates and rotation angle  
have been set.  
The image serving as the reference is the PinP image of the menu being operated.  
  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), turn [F1] to display the Sync sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
PinP1 8 Prior  
Sync  
Synm  
| 1over2|  
Off|  
2over1  
X
Y
Center  
Setting the priority  
  
Turn [F2] to select, using the Prior item, to set the positional relationship when the PinP1 and PinP2 images  
overlap.  
1over2: The PinP1 image is placed over the PinP2 image  
2over1: The PinP2 image is placed over the PinP1 image  
Linking PinP1 and PinP2  
  
Turn [F3] to set the position that will serve as the reference.  
The image serving as the reference is the PinP image of the menu being operated.  
When “X” has been selected as the Synm setting  
When “Y” has been selected as the Synm setting  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the X axis.  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the Y axis.  
When “Center” has been selected as the Synm setting  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the center.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5-7. PinP decorations  
A border or soft effect can be added to PinP.  
  
Press the [PinP1] button (or [PinP2] button) to light its indicator and display the PinP1 menu (or PinP2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Border sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
PinP1 2 Border Width  
Soft  
Mode  
Border |  
Off|  
5.0|  
0.0|  
Fix  
On  
0.1  
|
0.0  
|
Var  
100.0 100.0  
  
Turn [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the Border item.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft item. The soft effect is OFF if 0.0 is set.  
When “On” has been selected as the Border item setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is  
indicated as the amount of soft effect.  
When only the soft effect is to be added to PinP, select “Off” as the Border item setting.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the change in the border width using the Mode Item.  
Fix: The border width is kept constant.  
Var (Variable): The border width changes to suit the PinP size.  
Setting the border color  
  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), turn [F1] to display the BodrCol sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
PinP1 3 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
0.0| 100.0| White  
BodrCol |  
0.0|  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 Yellow  
Cyan  
|
359.9 100.0 108.0 Green  
Magenta  
Red  
Blue  
Black  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the border color.  
To call the preset color  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5] switch.  
The Hue, Sat and Lum values are changed to the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset color, refer to “3-10. Memory”.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-5-8. Trimming settings  
  
Press the [PinP1] button (or [PinP2] button) to light its indicator and display the PinP1 menu (or PinP2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Trim sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
PinP1 6 Trim  
Trim  
Manual  
|
Off|  
Free|  
Manual  
4:3  
Pair  
  
Turn [F2] to select the trimming type using the Trim item.  
Off:  
4:3:  
No trimming  
Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio is 4:3  
Manual: Trimming using the value set on the TrimAdj sub menu  
  
Turn [F3] to select the operation to be performed during the manual setting using the Manual item.  
Free: The Left, Right, Top and Bottom parameters change independently.  
However, the Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly, the Top  
setting cannot exceed the Bottom setting (and vice versa).  
Pair: The settings are changed in such a way that the Left and Right trimming amounts and the Top and  
Bottom trimming amount are the same. (This makes for a top-bottom and left-right symmetry.)  
  
Turn [F1] to display the TrimAdj sub menu, and turn [F2], [F3], [F4] and [F5] to set the trimming values.  
Operation  
F2  
Parameter  
Left  
Description of setting  
Trimming value at left  
Setting range  
−50.00 to 50.00  
Initial value  
−40.00  
40.00  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Top  
Trimming value at top  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
Bottom  
Right  
Trimming value at bottom  
Trimming value at right  
−40.00  
40.00  
<Trimming settings> (figure shows the default values)  
Area trimmed  
50  
TOP (40)  
Area where PinP is effective  
0
Original size of PinP  
BOTTOM (-40)  
-50  
-50  
(-40)  
0
50  
(40)  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6. DSK (downstream key)  
Characters or other images can be combined with the background image.  
This unit supports two DSK channels.  
3-6-1. Selecting the DSK type  
  
Press the [DSK1] button (or [DSK2] button) to light its indicator and display the DSK1 menu (or DSK2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the DSK1 sub menu (or DSK2 sub menu).  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
DSK1  
1 Type  
LumKey Fill  
PVW  
| Linear|ChrmOff|  
Bus|  
Off  
On  
Lum ChrmOn Matte  
  
Turn [F2] to select the Type item.  
Lum (luminance key/self key):  
This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key fill signal.  
Linear (linear key/EXT key):  
This is for creating the key signals from the luminance component of the key source signal.  
It is used when the key source signal and key fill signal are different.  
Since the luminance key is operated as a self key, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals.  
When the luminance key has been selected as the downstream key type, the key signals will remain  
unchanged even when the key source signals are switched.  
When using the linear key, use material with a black background and white characters or shape to be  
combined by the key as the key source signal.  
Material which is not black and white may not be combined clearly.  
Material with a white background and black characters, etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for  
use.  
  
When the luminance key has been selected, the chroma components can be contained in the key signals  
generated in view of the fact that it is used as a self key. (This is not applied to the linear key.)Turn [F3] to  
select the setting using the LumKey item.  
ChrmOn: In addition to the luminance components, the chroma components are also factored in when  
generating the key signals.  
Use this setting if colors with low luminance components are used for the key signals (when,  
for instance, blue characters are to be removed).  
ChrmOff: The key signals are generated only from the luminance components.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.  
Bus: The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.  
Matte: The internal fill matte is used for the key fill signal.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
Setting the fill matte color  
  
On the DSK1 menu (or DSK2 menu), turn [F1] to display the FillMatt sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
DSK1  
3 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
0.0| 100.0| White  
FillMatt|  
0.0|  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 Yellow  
Cyan  
|
359.9 100.0 108.0 Green  
Magenta  
Red  
Blue  
Black  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum of the fill matte.  
To call the preset color  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5] switch. The Hue, Sat and Lum  
values are changed to the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset color, refer to “3-10. Memory”.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6-2. Selecting the DSK channel and DSK fill material  
When the [DSK 1/2] button among the AUX bus selector buttons is pressed and it has lighted in amber, DSK1 is  
displayed as the menu.  
The state in which the DSK1 fill material is selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
If the button has lighted in green, DSK2 is displayed as the menu, and the state in which the DSK2 fill material is  
selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
The selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber. (It will light in red if the selected signal is a PGM output  
signal.)  
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE A  
IMAGE B  
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
4
5
6
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
DSK 1/2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
AMBER:1 / GREEN :2  
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
SHIFT  
Selecting the DSK source signal  
As with the selection of the KEY source signal, set the DSK source for the DSK fill.  
This setting is the same for KEY and DSK.  
Setting with AUX bus crosspoint buttons  
  
Press the [DSK 1/2] button (or [KEY] buttons) of the AUX bus selector buttons to light its indicator, and hold  
down the AUX bus crosspoint button for the selected key fill signal.  
<Menu display>  
|
XPTStats FILL: INPUT1  
SRC↓ INPUT1  
| XPT : 1  
  
Turn the [F5] and select a DSK source signal (SRC) for the DSK fill signal (FILL), and press the [F5] switch.  
Setting in the CONFIG menu  
<Menu display>  
CONFIG11 Fill  
KSAsign |  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator,  
|
|
|
|
|
Source↓  
—|  
and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
—|  
IN1~16 IN1~16  
IN-A1 IN-A1  
IN-A2 IN-A2  
IN-B1 IN-B1  
IN-B2 IN-B2  
  
Turn [F1] to display the KSAsign sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select the DSK fill material using the  
Fill item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the DSK source material using  
the Source item, and press the [F3] switch.  
CBGD  
CBAR  
CBGD  
CBAR  
The luminance and chroma keys are used as self  
keys so the DSK fill signal can be used as the DSK  
source signal regardless of the menu setting.  
FMEM1~4 FMEM1~4  
NoAsign  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6-3. DSK transitions  
  
Set the transition time.  
On the TIME menu, turn [F1] to display the DSK1 sub menu (or DSK2 sub menu).  
As with background transitions, set the transition time.  
Refer to “3-1-6. Auto transition”.  
  
When the [DSK1 ON] button (or [DSK2 ON] button) in the transition area is pressed,  
the DSK1 image (or DSK2 image) is combined (fades in) for the length of the transition  
time that has been set.  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
During fade-in, the [DSK1 ON] button (or [DSK2 ON] button) blinks in red, and when the transition is  
completed, it lights in red.  
When the [DSK1 ON] button (or [DSK2 ON] button) is pressed after fade-in is completed, the DSK1 image  
(or DSK2 image) transitions (fades out).  
During fade-out, the [DSK1 ON] button (or [DSK2 ON] button) lights in red, and when the transition (fade-  
out) is completed, it goes off.  
If the [DSK1 ON] button (or [DSK2 ON] button) is pressed at any point during a transition, the direction of the  
transition is reversed.  
3-6-4. DSK preview  
Select whether to output the DSK1 (or DSK2) preview image to the preview output.  
  
Press the [DSK1] button (or [DSK2] button) to light its indicator and display the DSK1 menu (or DSK2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
DSK1  
1 Type  
LumKey Fill  
PVW  
| Linear|ChrmOff|  
Bus|  
Off  
On  
Lum ChrmOn Matte  
  
Turn [F5] to set the PVW item.  
On: An image with the DSK1 (or DSK2) effect added is output to the preview output.  
Off: An image without the DSK1 (or DSK2) effect added is output to the preview output.  
PVW On and Off can be allocated to the user buttons. See “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6-5. DSK adjustments  
The DSK definition can be adjusted.  
  
Press the [DSK1] button (or [DSK2] button) to light its indicator and display the DSK1 menu (or DSK2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
2 Clip  
Gain  
Density Invert  
Off  
Adjust |  
0.0| 100.0| 100.0|  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the DSK (downstream key) definition.  
  
Turn [F5] to set key invert.  
If On is set, the key signals generated internally are inverted.  
Operation  
F2  
Parameter  
Clip  
Description of setting  
Setting range  
Reference level for generating key signals 0.0 to 108.0  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Gain  
Key amplitude  
Key density  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
On, Off  
Density  
Invert  
Key signal inversion  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6-6. DSK decorations  
A border, shadow or other type of edge can be added to DSK.  
Setting the edge  
<Menu display>  
  
Press the [DSK1] button (or [DSK2] button) to light  
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
Edge  
4 Type  
|
Width  
Direc  
its indicator and display the DSK1 menu (or DSK2  
menu).  
Off|  
2|  
0|  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
Border  
Drop  
0~4  
45  
90  
Shadow  
Outline  
135  
180  
225  
270  
315  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Edge sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select the edge type.  
Off: An edge is not added.  
Border: A border is added around the entire edge.  
Drop: A diagonal border is added.  
Shadow: A shadow is added.  
Outline: An outline (only a border with no fill) is added.  
Border  
Shadow  
Outline  
Drop  
(Top)  
225  
  
Turn [F3] to set the edge width.  
180  
270  
315  
0
  
Turn [F4] to set the direction (in 45-degree increments) in  
which “Drop” and “Shadow” will be added.  
(Left)  
(Right)  
135  
90  
45  
(Bottom)  
<Menu display>  
Setting the edge color  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
DSK1  
5 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
EdgeCol |  
0.0|  
0.0|  
0.0| Black  
  
On the DSK1 menu (or DSK2 menu), turn [F1] to  
display the EdgeCol sub menu.  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 White  
| Yellow  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and  
Lum of the edge color.  
359.9 100.0 108.0  
Cyan  
Green  
Magenta  
Red  
To call the preset color  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load  
item, and press the [F5] switch. The Hue, Sat and  
Lum values are changed to the preset color values.  
Blue  
To save the values that were set before calling the  
preset color, refer to “3-10. Memory”.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-6-7. Masking the DSK signals  
These steps are taken to mask the DSK signals using the mask signal of the box pattern.  
  
Press the [DSK1] button (or [DSK2] button) to light its indicator and display the DSK1 menu (or DSK2  
menu).  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
Mask  
6 Mask  
Invert  
|
Off|  
Off|  
Manual  
4:3  
On  
  
Turn [F2], and select the masking method using the Mask item.  
Off: The DSK signals are not masked.  
Manual: The area that is set using the MaskAdj sub menu is masked.  
4:3: The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect ratio.  
  
Turn [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using the Invert item.  
On: The mask signal is inverted.  
Off: The mask signal is not inverted.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the MaskAdj sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
DSK1  
7 Left  
Top  
Bottom Right  
MaskAdj | −25.00| 25.00| −25.00| 25.00  
  
Turn [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.  
Operation  
F2  
Parameter  
Left  
Description of setting  
DSK left position  
Setting range  
−50.00 to 50.00  
Initial value  
−25.00  
F3  
Top  
DSK top position  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
F4  
F5  
Bottom  
Right  
DSK bottom position  
DSK right position  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−25.00  
25.00  
The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot  
exceed the Bottom setting (and vice versa).  
<DSK mask setting> (figure shows the default values)  
Area masked  
50  
TOP (25)  
Area where the DSK signal is  
effective  
0
BOTTOM (-25)  
-50  
Video signal range  
(-25)  
LEFT  
(25)  
RIGHT  
-50  
0
50  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-7. FTB (fade to black)  
The user can fade out from a program image to the black screen or fade in to a program image from a black  
screen.  
  
Set the duration of the transition.  
On the TIME menu, turn [F1] to display the FTB sub menu.  
As with a background transition, set the transition time.  
See “3-1-6. Auto transition”.  
  
When the [FTB ON] button in the transition area is pressed, fade-out to the black screen  
is initiated.  
FTB  
ON  
During fade-out, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button blinks in red, and it lights in red  
when the transition (fade-out) is completed, and the black screen is displayed.1  
When the [FTB ON] button is pressed with the black screen displayed, fade-in to the  
program image is initiated.  
During fade-in, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button lights in red, and it goes off when the  
transition (fade-in) is completed.  
If the [FTB ON] button is pressed during the transition, the transition direction is reversed.  
1: In the FTB status, the crosspoint button which is normally lighted in red lights in amber.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-8. Internal color signals  
3-8-1. Setting the color background  
The color background to be used by the bus can be set.  
Two methods are available: under one method the Hue (hue), Sat (color saturation) and Lum (luminance) are set,  
and under the other the 8 preset colors (white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue and black) are called.  
The Hue, Sat and Lum of the called colors can also be adjusted.  
Adjusting the colors  
  
Press the [CBGD] button and display the CBGD menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Load↓  
CBGD  
CBGD  
1 Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
0.0| 100.0| White  
|
0.0|  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
0.0 Yellow  
Cyan  
|
359.9 100.0 108.0 Green  
Magenta  
Red  
Blue  
Black  
  
Turn [F2], [F3] and [F4] to perform the color adjustments (Hue, Sat and Lum).  
Calling the preset colors  
Turn [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item, and press the [F5] switch.  
The Hue, Sat and Lum values are changed to the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset color, refer to “3-10. Memory”.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-9. Switching the AUX output  
3-9-1. Selecting the AUX output materials  
The AUX1 to AUX4 output signals can be selected.  
  
Press one of the [AUX1] to [AUX4] buttons among the AUX bus selector buttons.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
  
Press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
The selected signal is output to the pressed [AUX1] to [AUX4] button.  
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE A  
IMAGE B  
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
4
5
6
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
DSK 1/2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
AUX4  
AMBER:1 / GREEN :2  
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
SHIFT  
The button with the signals selected by AUX1 lights in amber.  
<Signals that can be selected by the AUX bus>  
Name of signal  
INPUT1 to 20  
Description of signal  
Input signal 1 to 20  
Program video signal  
Preview video signal  
Clean signal  
PGM  
PVW  
CLN  
MV1, MV2  
KeyOut  
FMEM1 to FMEM4  
CBGD  
Multi view display output signal 1, 2  
Key output signal  
Frame memories 1 to 4  
Color background  
CBAR  
Color bar  
When the AUX bus is selected on the sub screen of the multi view display, the image is looped as if two  
mirrors have been placed opposite each other.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-9-2. AUX1 transitions  
The MIX transition is executed when the output signal set for AUX1 is switched.  
  
Press the [AUX1] button of the AUX bus selector buttons.  
The selected button and its corresponding AUX bus crosspoint button light in amber.  
  
Press the AUX bus crosspoint button for the output signal to be switched to.  
The MIX transition is now initiated for the length of the transition time that was set using the TIME menu.  
While the transition is underway, the transition source AUX button lights in green, and the transition  
destination AUX button blinks in amber.  
As soon as the transition is completed, the transition source AUX button goes off, and the transition  
destination AUX button lights in amber.  
Furthermore, when another signal is selected at a midway point through a transition, the transition  
processing continues from that midway point.  
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE A  
IMAGE B  
FMEM  
SDCard  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
BKGD  
AUX2  
CKEY  
CBGD  
CAM  
OUT  
4
5
6
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
DSK 1/2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
AMBER:1 / GREEN :2  
MENU FUNCTION / AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
AUX  
SHIFT  
Blinks in amber (while the transition is underway).  
Lights in green.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-9-3. Setting enable/disable for the AUX1 transition  
The AUX1 transition time and transition enable/disable can be set.  
  
Press the [TIME] button to light its indicator and display the TIME menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the AUX1 sub menu.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the display unit using the Unit item.  
  
If frame has been selected as the unit, turn [F2] or [F3] to set the length of the transition time.  
  
If second (sec) has been selected as the unit, turn [F2] to set the second unit or turn [F3] to set the frame  
unit.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
TIME  
AUX1  
7 TransTime  
16s|  
Unit  
ENBL  
Sec| Enable  
|
39f|  
|
|
|
ENBL  
TIME  
AUX1  
7 TransTime  
|
Unit  
999f| Frame| Enable  
Disable  
Any time in the range from 0 to 999f can be set. Depending on the video format, the time that can be set  
with a display in seconds will differ.  
59.94i: max. 33s09f, 59.94p: max. 16s39f, 50i: max. 39s24f, 50p: max. 19s49f,  
24psf: max 41s15f, 23.98psf: max 41s15f  
  
Turn [F5] to set enable or disable for the transition using the ENBL item.  
Enable: Enable  
Disable: Disable  
When disable has been set for the transition, the output signals are switched with no transition when the  
output signals set in AUX1 is switched.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10. Memory  
Background transition patterns, PinP sizes, border widths and other video statuses can be stored in and recalled  
from the memory.  
Depending on what statuses are to be stored in the memory, the SHOT memory, BKGD/WIPE memory, PinP  
memory and CAM memory are available. Furthermore, by setting effect dissolve, the switching from the current  
image to an image or operation stored in the SHOT memory can be changed smoothly.  
PAGE  
1
4
7
2
3
SHOT  
MEM  
STOR  
WIPE  
1
4
7
2
5
3
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
DEL  
8
9
8
9
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
It is also possible to select the switcher (AV) system or camera (AW) system for the colors in which the function  
buttons are to light when memory operations (store, recall, delete) have been performed.  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the SHOT MEM sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG 2 LEDMode  
SHOT MEM|  
AV|  
AW  
  
Turn [F2] to select the lighting method for the function buttons using the LEDMode item.  
AV: Switcher system (the buttons light in green).  
AW: Camera system (the buttons light in amber).  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10-1. Memory registration and recall items  
Material selected  
Transition  
Pattern  
Menu  
SHOT memory  
[SHOT MEM]  
PGM/A bus  
PST/B bus  
PinP1 bus  
Fader amount  
(BKGD, KEY)  
BKGD patterns  
(MIX, WIPE)  
KEY patterns (MIX, PinP1  
WIPE)  
KEY  
CHR KEY  
Wipe direction  
PinP1 ON/OFF  
PinP2 ON/OFF  
DSK1 ON/OFF  
DSK2 ON/OFF  
PinP2 bus  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
KEY Fill bus  
DSK1 Fill bus  
DSK2 Fill bus  
TIME (BKGD)  
TIME (KEY)  
TIME (PinP1, 2)  
TIME (DSK1, 2)  
TIME (EFF DSLV)  
TIME (FTB)  
TIME (AUX)  
IMAG A  
IMAG B  
CBGD  
BKGD  
BKGD/WIPE memory  
[BKGD/WIPE MEM]  
PGM/A bus  
PST/B bus  
Fader amount  
Wipe direction  
BKGD patterns  
(MIX, WIPE)  
TIME (BKGD)  
BKGD  
PinP memory  
[PinP MEM]  
PinP1 bus  
PinP2 bus  
PinP1 ON/OFF  
PinP2 ON/OFF  
PinP1  
PinP2  
TIME (PInP1, 2)  
CAM memory  
[CAM MEM]  
The preset numbers, which have been stored in the pan-tilt head selected, can be stored,  
recalled or deleted.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10-2. Storing the settings in the memory (Store)  
The settings for the images and operations to be kept in the memory can be stored in the number keys (1 to 10).  
PAGE  
1
4
7
2
3
SHOT  
MEM  
STOR  
WIPE  
1
4
7
2
5
3
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
DEL  
8
9
8
9
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
  
Using the unit, set the images or operations to be kept in the memory.  
  
Press one of the buttons — [SHOT MEM], [BKGD WIPE MEM], [PinP MEM] or [CAM MEM] — to select the  
corresponding memory whose settings are to be stored.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STOR] button, [RECALL] button or [DEL] button  
lights.  
  
Press the [STOR] button.  
The [STOR] button lights in red.  
  
Hold down (for about 2 seconds) the number key (1 to 10) in which the settings are to be stored. When the  
storing on the settings in the held-down button is completed, the pressed number key lights in green (or in  
amber with the AW system).  
  
Repeat the above steps to register other types of settings in other number keys.  
All the items of the selected type of the memory unit (SHOT memory, BKGD WIPE memory, PinP memory  
and CAM memory) are stored in one number key.  
Refer to “3-10-1. Memory registration and recall items”.  
The preset numbers stored in the pan-tilt heads are used for the [CAM MEM] button. The numbers stored  
by the number keys in the memory area serve as the preset numbers of the pan-tilt heads.  
No settings can be stored in the number key that is lighted in green (or in amber with the AW system)  
when the [STOR] button is pressed. First delete the memory settings in the number key, and then repeat  
the storage procedure.  
Be careful when registering settings using the [CAM MEM] button, as preset numbers stored in the pan-tilt  
heads are forcibly registered.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in the memory (Recall)  
Recall  
PAGE  
1
4
7
2
3
SHOT  
MEM  
STOR  
WIPE  
1
4
7
2
5
3
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
DEL  
8
9
8
9
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
  
Press one of the buttons — [SHOT MEM], [BKGD WIPE MEM], [PinP MEM] or [CAM MEM] — to select the  
corresponding memory whose operations are to be recalled.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STOR] button, [RECALL] button or [DEL] button  
lights.  
  
Press the [RECALL] button. The [RECALL] button lights in amber.  
The button of the number key containing the stored operations lights in green (or in amber with the AW  
system).  
However, it will not light if [CAM MEM] has been selected.  
  
Press the number key (1 to 10) whose stored operations are to be recalled.  
The items of the selected memory unit are targeted as the stored operations that will be recalled.  
Refer to “3-10-1. Memory registration and recall items”.  
When another number button is pressed, the memory items stored in the pressed button will be recalled.  
  
As soon as the stored operation that has been recalled is played, the [UNDO] button becomes operable, and  
it lights in amber.  
If the [UNDO] button is pressed while it is lighted, the status before the stored operation is played will be  
restored.  
When the [CAM MEM] button is selected, the [UNDO] button will have no effect so it will not light.  
The [CAM MEM] button uses the preset numbers stored in the pan-tilt heads.  
Bear in mind that if the preset details have been changed at the pan-tilt head after a preset number was  
stored using the [CAM MEM] button, it will be the changed details that will be recalled.  
  
To exit memory recall, press the [STOR] button or [SHOT MEM] button.  
XPT DSBL  
When number key No.11 [XPR DSBL] is pressed while a stored operation is playing, it will light in amber. When  
the [RECALL] button is now pressed, the selected materials of the PGM/A bus, PST/B bus, KEY bus, PinP1/2 bus  
and DSK1/2 bus will be excluded from the target for stored operations.  
The number key No. 11 [XPT DSBL] will not light when the [CAM MEM] button is selected, as the operations of  
the key are disabled.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10-4. Deleting the operations stored in the memory (Delete)  
PAGE  
1
4
7
2
3
SHOT  
MEM  
STOR  
WIPE  
1
4
7
2
5
3
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
DEL  
8
9
8
9
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
10  
11  
12  
UNDO  
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
MEMORY / PATTERN  
  
Press one of the buttons — [SHOT MEM], [BKGD WIPE MEM], [PinP MEM] or [CAM MEM] — to select the  
corresponding memory whose operations are to be deleted.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last, the [STOR] button, [RECALL] button or [DEL] button  
lights.  
  
Press the [DEL] button.  
The [DEL] button lights in red.  
The button of the number key containing the stored operations lights in green (or in amber with the AW  
system).  
However, it will not light when [CAM MEM] is selected.  
  
Hold down (for about 2 seconds) the number key (1 to 10) used to delete the stored operations.  
The button of the pressed number key goes off.  
  
As soon as the stored operations are deleted, the [UNDO] button becomes operable and lights in amber. If  
the [UNDO] button is pressed while it is lighted, the status before the stored operation was deleted will be  
restored.  
The [CAM MEM] button deletes specified preset numbers registered in the pan-tilt heads.  
When the [CAM MEM] button is selected, the [UNDO] button will have no effect so it will not light.  
  
To exit memory delete, press the [DEL] button or [SHOT MEM] button.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-10-5. Effect dissolve  
Switching from the current image to the image or operation stored in the SHOT memory can be performed  
smoothly.  
For the items targeted by effect dissolve, refer to the SHOT memory items in “3-10-1. Memory registration and  
recall items”.  
  
Press the [SHOT MEM] button, and then press the [RECALL] button.  
  
Press number key No.12 [EFF DSLV] to enable effect dissolve.  
When the function is enabled, the number key No.12 [EFF DSLV] lights in amber.  
  
Press the number key (1 to 10) containing the stored operation.  
The switching from the current image to the stored operation recalled by pressing the number key is  
performed smoothly. The time taken for the change is set on the EFF DSLV sub menu of the TIME menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
TIME  
8 TransTime  
1s|  
Unit  
EFF DSLV|  
0f|  
Sec|  
0~13S 0~999f Frame  
Pressed number keys blink in green (or in amber with the AW system) while the operation switching is under  
way.  
When the operation switching has been completed, the pressed number key lights in amber (or in green with  
the AW system).  
When number key No.12 [EFF DSLV] is pressed at any point during the operation switching, the switching is  
canceled, and switching is initiated to the operation of the number key that was selected at that instant.  
During the operation switching, the operation of the fader lever is canceled.  
During the operation switching, other stored operations cannot be recalled.  
When initiating PinP1/2 and DSK1/2 transitions, the switching process is not stored in the memory.  
The number key No.12 [EFF DSLV] will not light when the [CAM MEM] button is selected, as the operations  
of the key are disabled.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-11. Frame memories  
Still images can be stored in the unit’s four internal frame memories for use.  
The still images are transferred to the frame memories through the AUX bus and an SD memory card.  
Conversely, the images in the frame memories can be transferred to an SD memory card.  
Images in the frame memories can be used as bus images by assigning FMEM1 to FMEM4 using the crosspoint  
assignment function.  
Data for images stored in the frame memory can be retained even when the power is turned off, by saving them in  
the flash memory area built into the mainframe.  
3-11-1. Transferring images from the AUX bus  
  
Press the [FMEM] button to light its indicator and display the FMEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the AUX sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
FMEM  
AUX  
1 FMEM  
| FMEM1|  
Select Review Exec↓  
AUX1|  
Off|  
FMEM1~4 AUX1~4  
On  
  
Turn [F2] to select the frame memory in which to store the image using the FMEM item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the AUX bus from which to transfer the images using the Select item.  
  
Turn [F4] to select on or off for the review display setting using the Review item.  
On: After the image has been imported, the images in the frame memory (FMEM1 to FMEM4) selected  
for the AUX bus are displayed (for 2 seconds).  
Even during review display, the next image can be imported.  
Off: No review display.  
  
Press the [F5] switch (Exec) to import the still images to the frame memory.  
The still images can also be imported using the user buttons.  
“StrFM1” to “StrFM4” have been allocated to the user buttons (See “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.), and  
when one of these buttons is pressed, it will light for an instant, and the still image is then imported.  
Review display  
Importing to FMEM1  
PGM  
PGM  
AUX  
AUX  
PGM  
PGM  
AUX  
AUX  
1
4
2
3
6
5
USER  
INPUT1  
INPUT5  
INPUT2  
INPUT6  
INPUT3  
INPUT4  
INPUT1  
INPUT5  
INPUT2  
INPUT6  
INPUT3  
FMEM1  
INPUT4  
FMEM1  
FMEM1  
FMEM2  
FMEM2  
FMEM2  
FMEM2  
Imported still image  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-11-2. Saving Images in Flash Memory  
Data for images stored in the frame memory can be retained even when the power is turned off, by saving them in  
the flash memory area built into the mainframe.  
Whether to automatically save the image data stored in the frame memory when the data is transferred from the  
AUX bus or to manually save them must be set.  
Care must be taken when selecting manual saving, as image data stored in the frame memory will be lost if the  
power to the mainframe is turned off before the saving operation is completed.  
  
Light the [FMEM] button by pressing it, and display the FMEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Memory sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
FMEM  
2 Mode  
Select  
Exec↓  
Memory |  
AUTO| ALL|  
Manual FMEM1~4  
  
Turn [F2] to select the saving method in the Mode item.  
AUTO: Automatic saving  
Manual: Manual saving  
  
Turn [F3] to select the frame memory for saving data in the flash memory area in the Select item.  
Selecting [ALL] will save data in all frame memory areas, from FMEM1 to FMEM4.  
  
Press the [F5] switch (Exec) to save data in the flash memory area.  
The [F5] switch becomes enabled when “Manual” is selected in the Mode item.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-12. SD memory cards  
The unit’s frame memory data and system data can be stored on SD memory cards.  
Conversely, this data can be loaded from the SD memory cards to the unit.  
Frame memory data (still image data):  
The unit supports 24-bit (uncompressed) BMP (bitmap) and JPEG (baseline) is the only file formats.  
JPEG format files can be loaded, but they become BMP format files when they are stored from the unit to the  
SD memory card.  
This unit cannot resize the images so resize them appropriately using another device such as a personal  
computer before saving them on the SD memory card.  
<Applicable sizes>  
HD/1080i: 19201080, HD/1080psf: 19201080, HD/720p: 1280720,  
SD/NTSC: 720487, SD/PAL: 720576  
BMP files:  
If the sizes are different, the center of the images will be lined up.  
If the image is large, it will be cropped.  
If the image is small, the area around it will be filled in with a black border.  
JPEG files:  
Images in the sizes listed in “Applicable sizes” above can be loaded.  
The pixels of images in SD format are not square, so the aspect ratio will be different when the images are  
displayed on the computer and when they are imported into frame memory (with NTSC format, they will be  
vertically long).  
To keep the images true to their actual proportions, make sure the original size is 720540 pixels. If the  
images are in NTSC format, use images shrunk to 720487 pixels. If the images are in PAL format, use  
images enlarged to 720576 pixels.  
System data:  
The “system data” refers to all the data stored in the unit with the exception of the date, time and network  
settings and of the still image data. The extension used for the system data files is “h45”.  
SD memory card handling precautions  
Do NOT eject the SD memory card while the SD memory card access LED is lighted.  
When an SD memory card is ejected while the SD memory card access LED is lighted, the transition of the  
operation from data access to card ejection may be temporarily suspended.  
In addition, the data stored on the SD memory card may be lost.  
The data stored on SD memory cards may be lost as a result of misplacing the cards or performing erroneous  
operations, for instance. It is recommended that valuable data be stored on a personal computer or other  
device.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-12-1. Initializing the SD memory cards  
In order for an SD memory card to be used in the unit, it must first be initialized by the unit. Initializing the SD  
memory card formats it (in compliance with the SD standard) and creates the dedicated directory.  
(All files saved on the SD memory card will be erased.)  
  
Insert the SD memory card into the unit’s SD memory card slot.  
  
Press the [SDCard] button to light its indicator and display the SDCard menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the File sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
SDCard 1 Mode↓  
File  
Select  
Init↓  
No  
| Init |  
—|  
|
|
|
|
|
SDCard 1 Mode↓  
File  
Select  
Init↓  
Yes  
| Init |  
—|  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Init” using the Mode item, and then press the [F2] switch.  
The “Init?” message now appears.  
If the SD memory card has not been inserted, “No Card” will appear at the Mode item.  
When the mode is selected, an asterisk () appears on the left of the selected mode (Init, Save, Load or  
Delete).  
If an asterisk does not appear, press the [F2] switch to select a mode.  
  
Turn [F5] to select “Yes,and press the [F5] switch to initialize the card.  
If “Load”, “Save” or “Delete” is selected and then the [F2] switch is pressed after a SD memory card not  
formatted in compliance with the SD standard has been inserted, a message indicating that “This card is not  
usable Please initialize it” is displayed.  
See “3-12-2. Saving data on SD memory cards” to “3-12-4. Deleting files on SD memory cards”.  
Before using a SD memory card in this unit, initialize it.  
This unit also supports SDHC memory cards.  
Memory cards can be initialized no matter whether they are SD or SDHC memory cards.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-12-2. Saving data on SD memory cards  
  
Insert the SD memory card which has been initialized by the unit, into the SD memory card slot.  
  
Press the [SDCard] button to light its indicator and display the SDCard menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the File sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Save” using the Mode item, and then press the [F2] switch.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SDCard 1 Mode↓  
Select SaveFile Exec↓  
File  
|
Save|  
—|  
FMEM1~4  
SetUp  
  
Turn [F3] to select the data which is to be stored on the SD memory card using the Select item.  
FMEM1 to 4: Still image data in frame memories 1 to 4  
SetUp:  
Setup data  
  
If the [F5] switch is now pressed, the file is stored on the SD memory card.  
Filenames are provided automatically using the running number as shown below.  
HS001.bmp to HS999.bmp  
<Configuration of folder at storage destination>  
System data:  
“HS400\SETUP” folder  
Still image data: “HS400\IMAGE” folder  
While the file is being stored, the following message and filename are displayed.  
|
SDCard 1 ∙∙∙Saving File∙∙∙  
File  
|
HS001  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-12-3. Loading data from SD memory cards  
  
Insert the SD memory card on which the data is stored into the SD memory card slot.  
Load the file after its data has been stored in the each folder.  
Data stored in other folders will not be recognized by the unit.  
System data:  
“HS400\SETUP” folder  
Still image data: “HS400\IMAGE” folder  
  
On the SDCard menu, turn [F1] to display the File sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Load” using the Mode item, and then press the [F2] switch.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SDCard 1 Mode↓  
Select LoadFile Exec↓  
—| HS001  
FMEM1~4  
SetUp  
File  
|
Load|  
  
Turn [F3] to select the transfer destination using the Select item.  
  
Using the LoadFile item, turn [F4] to select the name of the file to be loaded.  
If the name of the file to be loaded consists of more than 8 characters, a shortened version of the filename  
will be displayed.  
  
If the [F5] switch is now pressed, the file is loaded from the SD memory card and stored in the unit’s internal  
memory.  
While the file is being loaded, the following message and filename are displayed.  
|
SDCard 1 ∙∙∙Loading File∙∙∙  
File  
|
HS001  
Up to 999 files can be loaded.  
The following alphanumerics and symbols can be used as the characters for filenames (see below).  
Files using other characters will not be displayed by the unit.  
<Characters which can be used for filenames>  
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, Space, ! # $ % & ' ( ) - . @ ^ _ ` { }  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Basic operations  
3-12-4. Deleting files on SD memory cards  
  
Insert the SD memory card on which the data is stored into the SD memory card slot.  
  
On the SDCard menu, turn [F1] to display the File sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select “Delete” using the Mode item, and then press the [F2] switch.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SDCard 1 Mode↓  
Select DelFile?  
No  
File  
| Delete|  
—|HS001  
FMEM  
Yes↓  
SetUp  
  
Turn [F3] to select FMEM (still image data) or SetUp using the Select item.  
If the name of the file to be loaded consists of more than 8 characters, a shortened version of the filename  
will be displayed.  
  
Using the DelFile? item, turn [F4] to select the name of the file to be deleted.  
  
Turn [F5] to select “Yes”, then press the [F5] switch, and the file is now deleted.  
3-12-5. Displaying the SD memory card information  
  
Insert the SD memory card on which the data is stored into the SD memory card slot.  
  
On the SDCard menu, turn [F1] to display the CardInfo menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SDCard 2 Images FreeSpace  
GetInf↓  
CardInfo|  
1|  
496MB/500MB|  
Images:  
The number of still image files stored on the SD memory card is displayed.  
The number of files that can be loaded using the unit is 999.  
“Over999” is displayed when an attempt is made to store 1000 or more files.  
FreeSpace: The SD memory card’s total memory and remaining free space are displayed in megabyte  
units (MB).  
(Free space/card’s total memory)  
  
Press the [F5] switch, and the display of information of Images item and FreeSpace item is updated.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1. Input signal settings  
IN1 to IN6 are SDI signal inputs.  
IN A1, IN A2, IN B1 and IN B2 can be set only when one of the following option boards has been connected.  
AV-HS04M1 (SDI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M2 (Analog Input Board)  
AV-HS04M3 (DVI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M6 (Analog Composite Input Board)  
AV-HS04M8 (Full-HD DVI Input Board)  
<List of settings by input signal>  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this manual  
Input connector  
FS  
4-1-1  
Mode  
4-1-2  
Freeze  
4-1-3  
ColCor  
4-1-4  
UpConv  
4-1-5  
IN1 to IN8  
IN9 to IN16  
IN13 to IN16  
Only DbyD  
selectable  
Standard  
SDI input 16 lines  
AV-HS04M1  
SDI input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M2  
Analog component input 2 lines  
Option slot  
IN A1,  
IN A2,  
IN B1,  
IN B2  
AV-HS04M3  
DVI-I input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M6  
Analog composite input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M8  
DVI-D input 2 line  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this manual  
DVIIn  
(Dig)  
DVIIn  
(Ana)  
Input connector  
AnaGain  
Setting  
4-1-6  
4-1-7  
4-2  
4-2  
IN1 to IN8  
IN9 to IN16  
IN13 to IN16  
Standard  
SDI input 16 lines  
AV-HS04M1  
SDI input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M2  
Analog component input 2 lines  
Option slot  
IN A1,  
IN A2,  
IN B1,  
IN B2  
AV-HS04M3  
DVI-I input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M6  
Analog composite input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M8  
DVI-D input 2 line  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer  
The frame synchronizer can be set to On or Off for each input.  
The DVI input (option) frame synchronizer is permanently On. It cannot be set from On to Off or vice versa.  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN1 to IN16, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the frame synchronizer function is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of FS.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CC  
INPUT XX FS  
| 1/13 |  
FS  
Mode↓  
On| Normal|  
Off  
On  
Off  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
  
Turn [F3] to set On or Off for the frame synchronizer using the FS item.  
If the output signal phase is set to 0H, Off cannot be selected as the FS item setting.  
AVDL function is active while the frame synchronizer function is set to Off.  
The AVDL function automatically adjusts the input image signal phase to the horizontal synchronization  
reference signal phase.  
For details, refer to “4-7. Adjusting the output signal phase”.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-2. Setting the input mode  
The mode can be set for each input only when HD has been selected as the system format.  
When SD is selected as the system format, the input mode is always the same as Normal.  
Normal: Input signals in conformity with the system format take effect.  
D by D: When SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format have been input, they are input on a  
dot by dot (1magnification) basis with no up-conversion.  
(This setting is only possible when the system format is 1080i.)  
In this mode, there is minimal deterioration in the image quality and, as such, the mode is used to  
combine SD format material using the PinP function.  
UC:  
When SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format have been input, they are  
up-converted.  
Auto:  
Input signals in conformity with the system format take effect.  
Furthermore, if SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format are input when HD is  
selected as the system format, they are up-converted.  
In the Auto mode, the images may be disturbed when the input signals are switched.  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F4] to set the input mode using the Mode item, and press the [F4] switch  
to enter the setting.  
An asterisk () appears at the left of the input mode currently selected.  
<List of input modes supported>  
Input  
System  
Mode  
480  
/59.94i  
(UC)  
(UC)  
576  
/50i  
(UC)  
(UC)  
1080  
/59.94i  
1080  
/50i  
1080  
/24psf  
1080  
720  
720  
/50p  
/23.98psf /59.94p  
SD 480/59.94i  
576/50i  
HD 1080/59.94i  
Normal  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
Normal  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
Normal  
DbyD  
UC  
1080/50i  
1080/24psf  
Auto  
1080/23.98psf Normal  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
Normal  
UC  
Auto  
Normal  
UC  
Auto  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
denotes a black screen.  
The UC mode or Auto mode cannot be selected for inputs 1 to 4.  
If D by D, UC or Auto mode is selected, the frame synchronizer will be turned on.  
The input mode cannot be changed when freeze is set to on.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-3. Freezing the input signals  
The input signals can be frozen and used.  
While signals are frozen, the tally signals of the corresponding input will not be output.  
Setting freeze  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN1 to IN16, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the freeze function is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of Freeze.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX Freeze Select Freeze↓  
| 2/13 | Frame|  
Off|  
On  
Field  
  
Turn [F3] to select the freeze method using the Select item.  
Frame: The images are frozen frame by frame.  
Field: The images are frozen field by field.  
This is used to freeze moving images.  
With interlace signals, however, diagonal lines and moving parts appear jagged.  
Frame or Field can also be selected while an image is frozen.  
  
Press the [F4] switch to freeze the input image or cancel the freeze.  
If the [F4] switch is pressed while the display is “Off”, the video signal is frozen, and the display is set to  
“On”.  
If the [F4] switch is pressed while the display is “On”, the video signal freezing is canceled, and the display is  
set to “Off”.  
The “F” mark appears in front of the name of the material when the signals set for output of multi view  
displays are frozen.  
When the unit is used with the frame synchronizer function OFF, the output images may be disturbed when  
freezing is executed, but the frozen images will not be adversely affected.  
If, when the switcher is used with the frame synchronizer function at OFF, On” is set as the freeze setting,  
the frame synchronizer function will be automatically switched to ON.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-4. Color corrector  
When the color corrector is enabled, the colors of the input video signals can be corrected. This function can be  
set for the signals that are input to IN9 to IN16.  
Enabling the color corrector  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN9 to IN16)  
The input used to enable the color corrector function is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of FS.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CC  
INPUT XX FS  
| 1/13 |  
FS  
Mode↓  
On| Normal|  
Off  
On  
Off  
DbyD  
UC  
Auto  
  
Turn [F5] to select On using the CC item.  
On: The color corrector function is enabled.  
Off: The color corrector function is disabled.  
When the color corrector function in enabled (CC item is set to On), the ClorCnv item on the third CC menu  
is automatically set to On as well.  
When the ClorCnv item on the third CC menu is set to Off, the CC item on the third FS menu is automatically  
set to Off as well.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC  
MTX  
Limiter CLEAR↓  
100| ALL  
| 6/13 |  
On|  
Off  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
Process control  
Adjusting theY signal gain and setting its slice level  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F2] to display the third menu of CC Prc1.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC Prc1 Y-Gain Slice  
| 7/13 | 100.0|  
0.0|  
0.0  
|
−7.0  
|
200.0 108.0  
  
Turn [F3] to set the gain value of the Y signal using the Y-Gain item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the slice level using the Slice item.  
Adjusting the gain and hue of the C signal  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F2] to display the third menu of CC Prc2.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC Prc2 C-Gain Hue  
| 8/13 | 100.0|  
0.0|  
0.0  
|
0.0  
|
200.0 359.9  
  
Turn [F3] to set the gain value of the C signal using the C-Gain item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the hue value using the Hue item.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
Tone curve  
The gray scale of the input images can be compensated.  
Set the tone curve, and adjust the image brightness, contrast  
and other characteristics.  
WhiteLv  
GrayPos  
Furthermore, by adjusting each of the R, G and B colors  
separately, the white balance and color tone can be adjusted.  
GrayLv  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F2] to display the  
third menu of CC Trn1.  
<Menu display>  
BlackLv  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC Trn1 RGB  
| 9/13 |  
Manual GrayPos  
R|  
ALL|  
0.50  
Input level  
G
B
Free  
0.25  
|
0.75  
  
Turn [F3] to select the color to be compensated using the RGB item.  
R: red, G: green, B: blue  
  
Turn [F4] to set the compensation mode using the Manual item.  
ALL: The R, G and B colors are all set to the same value.  
When the mode has been set to ALL, the colors set using the RGB item are canceled.  
Free: Each of the R, G and B colors is set separately.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the gray level position using the GrayPos item.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of CC Trn2.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC Trn2 BlackLv GrayLv WhiteLv  
| 10/13 |  
0.00|  
0.50|  
1.00  
0.00  
|
0.25  
|
0.50  
|
0.50  
0.75  
1.00  
  
Turn [F3] to set the black level using the BlackLv item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the gray level using the GrayLv item.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the white level using the WhiteLv item.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
Adjusting the color matrix item gain  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F2] to display the third menu of CC MTX1.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX CC MTX1 R-G  
| 11/13 |  
R-B  
0.00|  
0.00|  
−1.00 −1.00  
|
|
1.00  
1.00  
  
Turn [F3] to set the matrix item R-G gain value using the R-G item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the matrix item R-B gain value using the R-B item.  
  
In the same way, set the matrix item G-R and G-B gain values using the third menu of CC MTX2, and set  
the matrix item B-R and B-G gain values using the third menu of CC MTX3.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-5. Setting the up-converter  
Select the settings for INPUT13 to 16, as well as for the up-converter that is built into the optional boards listed  
below:  
AV-HS04M1 (SDI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M2 (Analog Input Board)  
AV-HS04M6 (Analog Composite Input Board)  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX UpConv1 Scale  
MovDet↓ Sharp↓  
SQ|  
3|  
3
| 4/13 |  
EC  
LB  
1~5  
1~5  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN1 to IN16, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the up-converter is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of UpConv1.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the scaling system using the Scale item, and press the [F3] switch to enter the selection.  
SQ (squeeze): The image is enlarged both horizontally and vertically to fill the entire screen.  
EC (edge crop): The aspect ratio of the image is maintained, the image size is increased in accordance  
with the vertical resolution, and black bands are added at the left and right.  
LB (letter box): The aspect ratio of the image is maintained, the image size is increased in accordance  
with the horizontal resolution, and the image is cropped at the top and bottom.  
Input image  
SQ  
EC  
LB  
  
Turn [F4] to set the image movement detection sensitivity using the MovDet item, and press the [F4] switch  
to enter the selection.  
1: Toward still images 3: standard 5: toward moving images  
  
Turn [F5] to set the extent of the edge sharpness for the images using the Sharp item, and press the [F5]  
switch to enter the selection.  
1: Not sharp edges 3: standard 5: very sharp edges  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
Fine-tuning of image positions  
Fine-tuning of image positions is performed when EC (edge crop) is selected for the scaling method.  
  
On the INPUT XX sub menu, turn [F2] to display the third menu of UpConv2.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX UpConv2 EC-Pos  
| 5/13 | Center|  
Right  
Left  
  
Turn [F3] to select the image position using the EC-Pos item.  
Center: The image is positioned at the center, and black images are added at the left and right.  
Right: The image is positioned at the right, and a black image is added at the left.  
Left:  
The image is positioned at the left, and a black image is added at the right.  
4-1-6. Setting the analog input gain (option)  
When the analog input board (option) has been connected, the gain of the input signals can be set.  
Alternatively, when the analog composite input board (option) has been connected, the gain of the Y signals can  
be set.  
The setting range is 30 steps, and the gain changes by approximately 2 dB. The amount of change in the gain  
when it is changed by one step is not fixed.  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the gain is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of FS.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX FS  
| 1/6 |  
FS  
Mode↓  
AnaGain  
0
On| Normal|  
−30  
|
+30  
  
Turn [F5] to set the gain of the input signal (Y signal gain) using the AnaGain item.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-1-7. Setting the analog composite input signals (option)  
When the analog composite input board (option) has been connected, the analog composite input signals can be  
set.  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the analog composite signal is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of Setting.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX Setting Chroma Ped  
| 3/5 | 0|  
−8~+7  
Hue  
0|  
0
−100 −30~+30  
|
+100  
  
Turn [F3] to adjust the chroma level using the Chroma item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 3 dB)  
The Auto Color Control function is activated, and the chroma level is kept at the value that has been set.  
  
Turn [F4] to adjust the pedestal level using the Ped item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 100 mV)  
  
Turn [F5] to adjust the hue using the Hue item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 20°)  
Adjustment of Hue is possible when the system format is 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94p and 480/59.94i.  
For details on the other settings, refer to the operating instructions of the optional board.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-2. Setting the DVI input signals (option)  
4-2-1. Setting the DVI input signals  
Set the DVI input signals when the DVI input board (option) or full HD DVI input board (option) has been  
connected.  
Signals with the following resolutions can be input.  
If signals with any other resolution or frequency are input, the picture will turn black.  
DVI Input Board (Digital/Analog)  
XGA  
WXGA  
SXGA  
(1024768), 60 Hz  
(1280768), 60 Hz  
(12841024), 60 Hz  
Full-HD DVI Input Board (Digital)  
XGA  
WXGA  
SXGA  
(1024768), 60 Hz  
(1280768), 60 Hz  
(12841024), 60 Hz  
WSXGA+  
UXGA  
WUXGA  
(16801050), 60 Hz  
(16001200), 60 Hz  
(19201200), 60 Hz  
1080/59.94P(19201080), 59.94 Hz  
1080/50P (19201080), 50 Hz  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the DVI signals is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of DVIIn.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Auto↓  
INPUT XX DVIIn  
Mode  
Scale  
| 3/4 |  
Dig| Fit-V| Black  
Ana Fit-H White  
Full  
Init  
  
Turn [F3] to select the signal system using the Mode item.  
Set this when the DVI input board (AV-HS04M3) has been connected.  
Dig: Digital input signals of the DVI connector are effective.  
Ana: Analog input signals of the DVI connector are effective.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
  
Turn [F4] to select the scaling method.  
Fit-V: The aspect ratio of the input images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the vertical resolution.  
Fit-H: The aspect ratio of the input images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the horizontal resolution.  
Full: The size of the input images is increased or reduced in accordance with the system resolution.  
(The aspect ratio of the input images is not kept the same. The rate at which the image size is  
increased or reduced in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction differs.)  
For details on the sizes that correspond to the formats, refer to “DVI input scaling size table” on the next  
page.  
  
The black level (offset) and white level (gain) of the analog input signals are adjusted automatically.  
Set this when the DVI input board (AV-HS04M3) has been connected.  
Depending on the personal computer used, there may be some deviation from the correct levels of the black  
level or white level.  
To proceed with automatic adjustment to correct this deviation, display the black-and-white signals  
(BW.bmp) on the supplied CD-ROM or the full-screen black signals and full-screen white signals on the  
personal computer connected to the DVI input connector, and input these signals as the DVI input signals.  
When using the black-and-white signals, position them so that the boundary between black and white comes  
to the center of the monitor screen.  
When using the full-screen black signals or full-screen white signals, display the black or white in an area  
that covers at least 80 % of the screen from the screen center.  
Before making any adjustments, follow the instructions given in the “Automatic adjustment of the black level”  
section.  
Automatic adjustment of the black level  
Input the black-and-white signals (BW.bmp) or full-screen black signals.  
Turn [F5] to select “Black” in the Auto item, and press [F5] to adjust the black level automatically.  
“… During Auto Setting …” is displayed on the LCD while adjustments are being made.  
Automatic adjustment of the white level  
Input the black-and-white signals (BW.bmp) or full-screen white signals.  
Turn [F5] to select “White” in the Auto item, and press [F5] to adjust the white level automatically.  
“… During Auto Setting …” is displayed on the LCD while adjustments are being made.  
Initializing the adjusted values  
Turn [F5] to select “Init” in the Auto item, and press [F5] to return the adjusted values to their factory  
settings.  
“… During Auto Setting …” is displayed on the LCD while adjustments are being made.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
DVI input scaling size table  
HD/1080i  
1920 1080  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂ  
HD/720P  
1280 720  
ꢆꢇꢂ  
SD/NTSC  
720 480  
720  
SD/PAL  
720 576  
720  
DVI format  
Mode  
XGA  
1024768  
Fit-V  
576  
480  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
720  
480  
720  
576  
Fit-H  
720  
480  
720  
576  
ꢀꢆꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢈꢉꢂ  
ꢀꢅꢃꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
Full  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
675  
480  
675  
576  
ꢆꢂꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
SXGA  
12801024  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
720  
480  
720  
576  
ꢀꢆꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢅꢃꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
WXGA  
1280768  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
: Black images are inserted here.  
: The parts of the images protruding in these areas are cropped.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
HD/1080i  
1920 1080  
1728  
HD/720P  
1280 720  
SD/NTSC  
720 480  
SD/PAL  
720 576  
DVI format  
WSXGA+  
Mode  
Fit-V  
1152  
720  
16801050  
1080  
Fit-H  
1920  
Full  
1280  
720  
720  
480  
720  
576  
1080  
1080  
1440  
UXGA  
Fit-V  
960  
720  
480  
720  
576  
16001200  
720  
Fit-H  
720  
480  
720  
576  
1920  
Full  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
1280  
720  
720  
480  
720  
576  
1080  
1080  
1728  
WUXGA  
19201200  
1152  
720  
1920  
Full  
1280  
720  
720  
480  
720  
576  
1080  
: Black images are inserted here.  
: The parts of the images protruding in these areas are cropped.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-2-2. Adjusting the DVI input signals  
Adjust the clock/phase and position of the DVI-I input signals.  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The input used to set the clock phase and position is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of DVIPhs.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
INPUT XX DVIPhs ClkPhs H-Pos  
| 4/4 | 0|  
−16  
V-Pos  
0|  
0
−100  
−100  
|
|
|
15  
100  
100  
  
Turn [F3] to adjust the clock phase of the analog input signals using the ClkPhs item.  
While viewing the image quality, set the value at which the noise level is minimized.  
  
Turn [F4] to adjust the horizontal position using the H-Pos item.  
  
Turn [F5] to adjust the vertical position using the V-Pos item.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-3. Setting the output signals  
OUT1 to OUT4 are SDI signal outputs.  
OUT5 and OUT6 are DVI-D signal outputs.  
OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT B1 and OUT B2 can be set only when one of the following option boards has been  
connected.  
AV-HS04M4 (Analog Output Board)  
AV-HS04M5 (DVI/Analog Output Board)  
AV-HS04M7 (SDI Output Board)  
<List of settings by output signal>  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this  
manual  
Output connector  
DVIOut  
(Dig)  
DVIOut  
(Ana)  
Asign  
4-3-1  
DownCnv  
4-4  
4-4  
4-5  
Standard  
SDI output 4 lines  
OUT1 to OUT4  
OUT5, OUT6  
Standard  
DVI-D output 2 lines  
AV-HS04M4  
Analog component output 2 lines  
Option slot  
OUT A1,  
OUT A2,  
OUT B1,  
OUT B2  
AV-HS04M5  
DVI-I output 1 line  
Analog component output 1 line  
AV-HS04M7  
SDI output 2 lines  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-3-1. Assigning the output signals  
Assign the output signals to OUTPUT1 to OUTPUT10.  
  
Press the [OUTPUT] button to light its indicator and display the OUTPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OUTPUTYY sub menu.  
(Y: OUT1 to OUT6, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The output used to assign the output signal is selected for Y.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the Asign sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
OUTPUTYY Asign  
Souce  
Mode↓  
| 1/2 |  
PGM| Normal|  
PVW  
CLN  
DC  
AUX1~4  
MV1,MV2  
KeyOut  
  
Turn [F3] to set the type of output signal using the Source item.  
PGM:  
An image provided with the wipe, mix, key, downstream key or other effect is output at the  
switcher's main line output.  
PVW:  
This is the preview output that enables the next operation to be checked before it is  
executed.  
AUX 1 to 4: The signals selected by the AUX bus in lines 1 to 4 are output.  
CLN:  
The clean signal (the image resulting when the key, downstream key or other effect has  
been removed from the PGM signal) is output.  
Refer to “Assigning the CLN signal”.  
MV 1, MV 2: The multi view display signals in two lines are output.  
Multiple input signals and output signals are reduced in size and output to one screen.  
KeyOut:  
The key signal is output.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
  
When the SDI output board (option) has been connected, turn [F4] to set the output mode using the Mode  
item, and press the [F4] switch to enter the setting.  
An asterisk () appears on the left of the currently selected output mode.  
Normal: The same signals as the system format signals are output.  
DC (down-converter):  
When the system format is 1080/59.94i or 720/59.94p, the signals are output in the 480/59.94i  
format.  
When the system format is 1080/50i or 720/50p, the signals are output in the 576/50i format.  
When the system format is SD (480/59.94i or 576/50i), this setting cannot be selected.  
Assigning the CLN signal  
Set KEYCLN, DSK1CLN or DSK2CLN as the CLN output.  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the CLNAsign sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
CLN  
KEY|  
|
|
|
|
CONFIG12  
CLNAsign|  
DSK1  
DSK2  
  
Turn [F2] to select the type of output signal using the CLN item.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-4. Setting the DVI output signals  
(OUT5 and OUT6 standard outputs and options)  
Set the DVI output signals of the OUT5 and OUT6 standard outputs and the DVI output signals if the DVI/analog  
output board (option) has been connected.  
<Menu display>  
OUTPUTYY DVIOut Mode  
  
Press the [OUTPUT] button to light its indicator  
|
|
|
|
Scale↓  
Size↓  
Dig|  
| 2/2 |  
Auto| Fit-V  
and display the OUTPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
Ana  
XGA Fit-H  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OUTPUTYY sub menu.  
(Y: OUT5, OUT6, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The output that supports the DVI signal is selected  
for Y.  
WXGA  
SXGA  
Full  
WSXGA+  
UXGA  
WUXGA  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of DVIOut.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the signal system using the Mode item, and press the [F3] switch to enter the selection.  
Set this when the DVI/analog input board (AV-HS04M5) has been connected.  
Dig: DVI digital signals are output from the DVI connector.  
Ana: DVI analog signals (RGB) are output from the DVI connector.  
When “Ana” has been selected, the display position of the image may be off depending on the  
monitor which is connected. If it is off, adjust the position at the monitor.  
For details on the adjustment method, refer to the operating instructions of the monitor.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the resolution of the images to be output, and press the [F4] switch to enter the selection.  
Auto:  
The equipment information of the output destination is captured by the DVI signals, and  
the images are output at the optimum resolution. (The vertical frequency is 60 Hz, and  
the maximum resolution is SXGA for analog output signals and WUXGA for digital output  
signals.)  
If the equipment information cannot be captured or if the resolution and frequency which  
can be output by the product are not contained in the equipment information, the images  
will be output at the XGA setting.  
XGA:  
The images are output at the 1024768 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
The images are output at the 1280768 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
The images are output at the 12801024 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
WXGA:  
SXGA:  
WSXGA+:  
The images are output at the 16801050 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
(This can be selected only when digital signals are output.)  
UXGA+:  
WUXGA:  
The images are output at the 16001200 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
(This can be selected only when digital signals are output.)  
The images are output at the 19201200 resolution and 60 Hz frequency.  
(This can be selected only when digital signals are output.)  
1080/59.94P: The images are output at the 19201080 resolution and 59.94 Hz frequency.  
(Only OUT5 and OUT6 can be selected.)  
1080/50P:  
The images are output at the 19201080 resolution and 50 Hz frequency.  
(Only OUT5 and OUT6 can be selected.)  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
  
Turn [F5] to select the scaling method, and press the [F5] switch to enter the selection.  
Fit-V: The aspect ratio of the output images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the vertical resolution.  
(Black bands are inserted into the areas where there are no images. The protruding parts of the  
images are cropped.)  
Fit-H: The aspect ratio of the output images is maintained, and the size of the images is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the horizontal resolution.}  
(Black bands are inserted into the areas where there are no images. The protruding parts of the  
images are cropped.)  
Full: The size of the output images is increased or reduced in accordance with the system resolution.  
(The aspect ratio of the output images is not maintained. The rate at which the image size is  
increased or reduced in the vertical direction differs from that in the horizontal direction.)  
Select the settings below is cases where DVI-D signals (OUT5 and OUT6) are output.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the Asign sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
MovDet↓  
OUTPUTYY Asign  
Souce  
3|  
| 1/2 |  
PGM|  
PVW  
CLN  
1~5  
AUX1~4  
MV1,MV2  
KeyOut  
  
Turn [F4] to set the video movement detection sensitivity using the MovDet item, and press the [F4] switch  
to enter the setting.  
1: Sensitivity closer to still image — 3: standard — 5: sensitivity closer to moving images  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-5. Setting the down-converter (option)  
Select the settings for the down-converter that is built into the SDI output board (option).  
<Menu display>  
OUTPUTYY DownCnv Scale↓ Delay↓ Sharp↓  
  
Press the [OUTPUT] button to light its indicator  
|
|
|
|
and display the OUTPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
3
| 2/2 |  
SQ|  
90H|  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OUTPUTYY sub menu.  
(Y: Out1 to Out4, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
EC  
LB  
1F  
1~5  
The output signal to be converted is selected for Y.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the third menu of DownConv.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the scaling system using the Scale item, and press the [F3] switch to enter the setting.  
SQ (squeeze):  
The top, bottom, left and right are reduced so that the aspect ratio is set to 4:3.  
EC (edge crop):  
The aspect ratio is maintained, the image is reduced in size in line with the vertical resolution, and it is  
cropped at the left and right.  
LB (letter box):  
The aspect ratio is maintained, the image is reduced in size in line with the horizontal resolution, and a  
black image is added at the top and bottom.  
Output image (SD)  
System image (HD)  
SQ  
EC  
LB  
  
Turn [F4] to set the delay time of the output using the Delay item, and press the [F4] switch to enter the  
setting.  
90H (75H): When the system format is 1080/59.94i, the image is delayed from the system image (HD)  
by 90H, and output.  
When the system format is 720/59.94p, the image is delayed from the system image (HD) by  
90H+1F (frame), and output.  
When the system format is 1080/50i, the image is delayed from the system image (HD) by  
75H, and output.  
When the system format is 720/50p, the image is delayed from the system image (HD) by  
75H+1F (frame), and output.  
When the system format is 1080/50i or 720/50p, “75H” is displayed on the menu.  
1F:  
The image is output in-phase with a delay of 1 frame from the system image (HD).  
For details on the phase and delay amounts, refer to “4-7. Adjusting the output signal phase”.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the degree of sharpness of the edges for the image using the Sharp item, and press the [F5]  
switch to enter the setting.  
1: Standard up to 5: sharper edges  
For details on the other settings, refer to the operating instructions of the optional board.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-6. Setting the sync signals  
The sync signals to be used by the system can be selected.  
External sync: For synchronization with an external sync signal (gen-lock).  
The reference input signal is looped through and output.  
BBST: Black burst signal (vertical phase of 0H)  
BBAD: Black burst signal  
Vertical phase of 90H when the 59.94i or 59.94p format is selected;  
vertical phase of 75H when the 50i or 50p format is selected  
TRI:  
Tri-level sync signal (vertical phase of 0H)  
This can be selected when HD format signals are supplied.  
Internal sync: For synchronization with an internal reference signal (INT).  
The REFOUT signal (black burst signal) is output from the two reference connectors.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Ref sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
Ref  
3 Sync↓  
BBSetup GenLock  
|
BBST| 7.5IRE|  
—|  
BBAD  
TRI  
0IRE Locked  
UnLock  
INT  
  
Turn [F2], select the sync signal using the Sync item, and press the [F2] switch to enter the selection.  
An asterisk () appears at the left of the reference signal currently selected.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the setup level of the black burst signal in the internal synchronization mode using the  
BBSetup item.  
This setting takes effect when the video system is 59.94i or 59.94p.  
The setup level is fixed at 0 IRE when the system is 50i or 50p.  
  
The genlock status is displayed in the GenLock item.  
Locked: Synchronized with the external sync signal or internal reference signal.  
UnLock: Not synchronized with the external sync signal or internal reference signal.  
When 1080/23.98PsF or 24PsF is selected as the format, INT (internal synchronization) cannot be selected in  
the SYNC item of the REF sub menu.  
This unit supports synchronization signals for field frequencies that are same as those of the system format.  
When the unit is set to the 1080/23.98PsF format, however, the unit also supports black burst signals with  
10F-1D (compliant with the SMPTE318M standard).  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-7. Adjusting the output signal phase  
The phase of the output video signals can be adjusted.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OutPhs sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
2 System H-Phase V-Phase  
1H| 0| 0|  
−100  
OutPhs |  
0H −1320  
|
|
+1319  
+100  
  
Turn [F2], and select 0H or 1H using the System item.  
0H: The output video signals are output to the system REF signal with using in-phase.  
The frame synchronizer function is ON for all input signals.  
1H: The output video signals are output to the system REF signal with 1H delay.  
When the frame synchronizer function is ON, the output video signals are output with 1 frame + 1H  
delay.  
  
Turn [F3] to adjust H phase using the H-Phase item.  
H-Phase can be adjusted within a range of –0.5H to +0.5H.  
The setting displayed on the menu differs depending on the video format.  
  
Turn [F4] to adjust V phase using the V-Phase item.  
V-Phase can be adjusted within a range of –100H to +100H.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
<Phase adjustment setup>  
REF  
(System standard)  
Approx. 0.2H  
AVDL Range  
Approx. –0.2H to +0.8H  
Approx.  
0.2H  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
• 1H Output  
(+1H)  
Output Phase Variable Range  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
AVDL Range  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
Approx. –0.7H to +0.3H  
Shortest  
Output (+0.5H)  
Approx.  
0.3H  
Output Phase Variable Range  
+0.5H  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
AVDL Range  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
Approx. +0.3H to +1.3H  
Longest Output  
(+1.5H)  
Approx.  
0.3H  
Output Phase Variable Range  
+0.5H  
• 0H Output  
(1F delay for REF and in-phase output)  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
Approx.  
0.2H  
FS Range  
Internal  
MAX less than approximately 1 frame  
Fixed DL  
Output Phase Variable Range  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
REF Phase Reference  
AVDL Range: Range for automatic phase adjustment.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
<Phases and delay amounts of input/output signals during HD format use>  
Frame synchronizer  
FS:  
On, Off  
Mode:  
Output  
signals  
Input  
signals  
Normal, UC or  
Video effects  
D by D (cannot be selected  
when the system format is  
720p)  
DC  
(Down-converter)  
See “4-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer”.  
Delay:  
90H (75H) or 1F  
See “4-5. Setting the down-converter  
(option)”.  
Output signal  
Normal  
Output signal  
DC (90H)  
Output signal  
DC (1F)  
OutPhs  
System  
Input  
Mode  
Non-  
synchronized  
input  
Delay  
amount  
Delay  
amount  
Delay  
amount  
FS  
Phase  
Phase  
Phase  
Sync signal (Ref): Black burst signal (BBST), tri-level sync signal (TRI), internal reference signal (INT)  
1H  
Normal  
Off  
Not possible  
Ref+1H  
1H  
1H+90H  
In-phase  
1H+1F  
+90H  
with  
Normal  
On  
Possible  
Possible  
Ref+1H  
Max.  
1F+1H  
Max.  
1F+1H  
+90H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F+1H  
+90H  
with  
UC/  
D by D  
On  
(Forced)  
0H  
Normal/ On  
(Forced)  
Possible  
In-phase  
with Ref  
Max.  
1F  
Max.  
1F+90H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F  
+90H  
(Example 1) UC/  
D by D  
Sync signal (Ref): Black burst signal (BBAD)  
with  
1H  
Normal  
Off  
Not possible  
Ref–90H  
+1H  
1H  
1H+90H  
In-phase  
1F+1H  
+90H  
with  
Normal  
On  
Possible  
Possible  
Ref–90H  
+1H  
Max.  
1F–90H  
+1H  
Max.  
1F+1H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F–90H  
+1H  
+90H  
with  
UC/  
D by D  
On  
(Forced)  
0H  
Normal/ On  
(Forced)  
Possible  
Ref–90H  
Max.  
1F–90H  
Max.  
1F  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F–90H  
+90H  
(Example 2) UC/  
D by D  
(In-phase  
with Ref)  
with  
For 1080/50i and 720/50p, the 90H indicated above becomes 75H.  
Conversion based on the HD format applies for 1H.  
When DVE effect, IMAGE effect and PinP effect have been used as the video effects, the output signal is  
delayed by +1F.  
The phase and delay amount for the DVI input signals are the same as when UC/D by D is selected since the  
frame synchronizer is set to the On mode.  
The DVI output signals are delayed by +1F.  
When images are output to a multi view display, they are delayed by +1F.  
When DVI output signals are output images for a multi view display, the output images are delayed by +2F.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
<Phase relationship between input signals and output signals>  
(for 1080/59.94i format)  
(Example 1)  
Input signals  
(non-synchronized)  
F1  
F2  
Sync signal (Ref)  
1F (frame)  
F1  
F2  
Output signal  
Max. 1F  
F1  
F2  
Output signal  
Output signal  
(90H)  
Max. 1F+90H  
F1  
F2  
(1F)  
Max. 2F  
(Example 2)  
Input signals  
F1  
F2  
(non-synchronized)  
Sync signal (Ref)  
1F (frame)  
F1  
F2  
Output signal  
Max.  
1F–90H  
F1  
F2  
Output signal  
Output signal  
(90H)  
Max. 1F  
F1  
F2  
(1F)  
Max. 2F–90H  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-8. Setting the multi view display  
The input images, program images, preview images, etc. can be arranged on the screen of an external monitor  
and output to two lines (MV1 and MV2).  
4-8-1. Setting the screen layout  
There are four multi view split-screen display modes: 16 split (the main screen is split into 16 subscreens),  
10 split, 9 split and 4 split.  
Inputs 1 to 20, CBGD, CBAR, FMEM1 to 4, PGM, PVW, AUX1-4 and KeyOut can be assigned to subscreens  
to  
.
A total of up to 20 subscreens for display as split screens can be set for MV1 and MV2.  
(If MV1 is set to 16 split, MV2 will be set to the 4 split mode, and it is not possible to set the mode to 9 split or  
above.)  
<Display modes>  
16-division mode (16Split):  
10-division mode (10Split):  
9-division mode (9Split):  
4-division mode (4Split):  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
  
Press the [MV] button to light its indicator and display the MV menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to select the MV1 PATT or MV2 PATT sub menu depending on the multi view output signals to be  
set.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
Pos  
|
|
Signal  
1|PGM  
MV  
1 Split  
MV1 PATT|10Split|  
16Split  
9Split  
4Split  
1~10 IN1~16  
IN-A1  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
IN-B2  
CBGD  
FMEM1~4  
PVW  
KeyOut  
AUX1~4  
  
Turn [F2] to set the split-screen display mode using the Split item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the subscreens ( to ) using the Pos item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the names of the signals to be displayed on the subscreens using the Signal item.  
When AUX1 to AUX4 have been selected, the signal names listed below will be displayed on the LCD for the  
signals selected as the AUX output signals.  
Refer to “3-9-1. Selecting the AUX output materials”.  
Name of signal  
IN1 to 20  
PGM  
Display on LCD  
Name of signal  
KeyOut  
FMEM1 to 4  
CBGD  
Display on LCD  
[KeyOut]  
[FM1] to [FM4]  
[CBG]  
[IN1] to [IN20]  
[PGM]  
[PVW]  
PVW  
CLN  
[CLN]  
CBAR  
[BAR]  
MV1, MV2  
[MV1], [MV2]  
If, when AUX2 to AUX4 have been selected, the multi view display output (MV1 or MV2) is selected for the  
AUX bus (AUX2, AUX3, AUX4) output signal, the images of the AUX bus displayed on the subscreens of the  
multi view display will be black images.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-8-2. Setting the split frame and characters  
Set the frame, character brightness and background of the split screens to be displayed on the multi view display.  
  
Press the [MV] button to light its indicator and display the MV menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to select the MV1 Frame or MV2 Frame sub menu depending on the multi view output signals to  
be set.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MV  
2 Frame  
Char Label  
Tally  
On|Red+GRN  
MV  
4 Frame  
Char Label  
Tally  
On|Red+GRN  
MV1Frame| LUM75%| LUM75%|  
MV2Frame| LUM75%| LUM75%|  
LUM 0% LUM 0%  
LUM25% LUM25%  
LUM50% LUM50%  
LUM100% LUM100%  
Off  
Red  
Off  
LUM 0% LUM 0%  
LUM25% LUM25%  
LUM50% LUM50%  
LUM100% LUM100%  
Off  
Red  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
  
Turn [F2] to set the split frame brightness and split frame display using the Frame item.  
LUM (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%):  
Select one of these settings for the brightness of the split frame (gray scale).  
Off: The split frame is not displayed.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the character brightness and character display using the Char item.  
LUM (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%):  
Select one of these character (gray scale) brightness settings.  
The “!” mark appears in front of the name of the material when no signals are input or signals with  
a different format are input.  
When signals amenable to camera control have been input, the “c” mark is displayed in front of  
the name of the material.  
When the input signal is frozen, the “F” mark is displayed in front of the name of the material.  
When the “!” mark is displayed, the “c” mark will not be displayed.  
When the “F” mark is displayed, the “!” mark and the “c” mark are not displayed.  
Off: The characters are not displayed. Neither is the character background shown.  
  
Turn [F4] to set whether the character background (half-tone) is to be displayed using the Label item.  
On: The character background is displayed.  
Off: The character background is not displayed.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-8-3. Setting the tally displays  
Set the tally displays to be superimposed onto the split frame of the multi view display.  
The red tally indicates material consisting of program outputs.  
The green tally indicates material selected by the preset bus.  
On the MV1 Frame or MV2 Frame sub menu, turn [F5] to set the tally displays using the Tally item.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MV  
2 Frame  
Char Label  
Tally  
On|Red+GRN  
MV  
4 Frame  
Char Label  
Tally  
On|Red+GRN  
MV1Frame| LUM75%| LUM75%|  
MV2Frame| LUM75%| LUM75%|  
LUM 0% LUM 0%  
LUM25% LUM25%  
LUM50% LUM50%  
LUM100% LUM100%  
Off  
Red  
Off  
LUM 0% LUM 0%  
LUM25% LUM25%  
LUM50% LUM50%  
LUM100% LUM100%  
Off  
Red  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Red+GRN: Both the red tally and green tally are displayed.  
Red:  
Off:  
Only the red tally is displayed.  
No tally displays are shown.  
The red tally is not displayed during FTB operation while the program images have been completely faded  
out to a black screen. At this time, the green tally is displayed for images consisting of program images.  
The red tally and green tally signals are output from the tally output connector on the rear panel.  
Refer to “5-7-3. Setting the GPI”.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-8-4. Changing the material names  
Change the names of the INPUT1 to 20 materials that are to be set on the multi view display.  
The default settings, preset settings or user settings can be selected for these names.  
When the preset settings and user settings are established, the material name (CAM1, etc.) display format is  
used.  
<Menu display>  
INPUT XX Name  
  
Press the [INPUT] button to light its indicator and  
|
|
|
|
|
Type↓  
display the INPUT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
| 3/13 | Defalt|  
Preset  
User  
  
Turn [F1] to display the INPUT XX sub menu.  
(X: IN1 to IN16, A1, A2, B1 or B2)  
The signal with the material whose name is to be  
changed is selected for X.  
  
Turn [F2] to display the Name sub menu.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the type of material name using the Type item, and press the [F3] switch to enter the type.  
An asterisk () appears at the left of the type of material name currently selected.  
Defalt: The default settings for INPUT1 to INPUT16, INPUTA1, INPUTA2, INPUTB1 and INPUTB2 are  
selected.  
Preset: The material names and number provided ahead of time are selected.  
User:  
The material names are set using 7 characters.  
If the Type item setting is changed when “Preset” or “User” is selected, the previously provided material  
names will be lost.  
Preset type setting procedure  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
  
INPUT XX Name  
Type↓  
Name  
NO.( )↓  
On the Name sub menu, turn [F3] to select “Preset”  
using the Type item.  
| 3/13 |Preset|  
CAM|  
1
  
Turn [F4] to select the material name using the  
Name item.  
C
CG  
CGV  
CGK  
1~9  
  
Turn [F5] to select the material number using the  
NO. item, and press the [F5] switch to enter the  
number.  
PC  
V
VTR  
VCR  
User type setting procedure  
<Menu display>  
INPUT XX Name  
| 3/13 |  
  
On the Name sub menu, turn [F3] to select “User”  
|
|
|
|
Type↓  
Name  
■AM8|  
(■)↓  
C
using the Type item.  
User|  
  
Turn [F4] to move the “” cursor to the position of  
the character to be changed using the Name item.  
  
Turn [F5] to select the character, and press the [F5]  
switch to enter it.  
  
Set all the characters in the material name by  
repeating steps  
and  
.
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-8-5. High-resolution multi view mode  
When the system mode is set to SD, the DVI-D output can be output in high resolution.  
If this is the case, MV1 is set for OUT5, and MV2 for OUT6.  
MV1 and MV2 cannot be set for any other outputs.  
These settings can be established when SD serves as the system mode.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Format sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SYS  
1 Mode↓  
HiRes↓ 16:9SQ  
Format |  
1080/59.94i|  
Off|  
Off  
1080/50i  
1080/24psf  
1080/23.98psf  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
On  
On  
480/59.94i  
576/50i  
  
Turn [F4] to set On or Off using the HiRes item, and press the [F4] switch.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-9. Setting the on-screen display (OSD)  
The menu screen can be superimposed onto the preview output or multi view display 1 or 2 output for display.  
<Menu display>  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and  
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG10 OSD  
OSD  
Select  
display the CONFIG menu.  
|
On|  
PVW|  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OSD sub menu.  
Off  
MV1  
MV2  
  
Turn [F2] to set whether to display the OSD using  
the OSD item.  
MV1+MV2  
On: OSD is displayed.  
Off: OSD is not displayed.  
This function can be assigned to a user button. See “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the output destination using the Select item.  
PVW: The menu screen is superimposed onto the preview output, and output.  
MV1:  
MV2:  
The menu screen is superimposed onto multi view display output 1, and output.  
The menu screen is superimposed onto multi view display output 2, and output.  
MV1+2: The menu screen is superimposed onto both multi view display outputs 1 and 2, and output.  
When On is selected as the OSD item setting, the multi view display split frame are not displayed on the  
monitor.  
Examples of OSD displays  
“>” appears to the left of the selected menu.  
This indicates the wipe pattern for the background  
transition.  
This indicates the wipe pattern for the  
key transition.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Input/output signal settings  
4-10. Setting the ancillary data  
In this section, the function for allowing the ancillary data of the SDI input signals to pass through is set.  
If SD format signals are input while the HD format has been set as the system format, it will not be possible for  
their ancillary data to be passed through.  
Setting the V ancillary data  
It is possible to decide whether to allow the V ancillary data, which is superimposed in the vertical blanking  
period of the input images, to pass through the PGM bus.  
The background bus data which is output to program (PGM) is passed through for images whose transition has  
been cut off.  
During a transition, the background bus data which was output to program (PGM) immediately before is passed  
through.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Anci sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
| |  
E.Audio  
|
|
SYS  
Anci  
4 VAnci  
|
Off|  
Off|  
On  
On  
  
Turn [F2] to select On or Off for the V ancillary data using the VAnci item.  
On: In the case of the HD format, the ancillary data starting with line 10 is passed through.  
In the case of the SD format, the ancillary data starting with line 14 is passed through.  
Off: The data is not passed through.  
Setting the embedded audio data  
The embedded audio data of the SDI input signals can be passed through the AUX bus.  
  
On the Anci sub menu, turn [F3] to select On or Off for the embedded audio data using the E.Audio item.  
<Menu display>  
|
| |  
E.Audio  
|
|
SYS  
Anci  
4 VAnci  
|
Off|  
Off|  
On  
On  
On: The data is passed through.  
Off: The data is not passed through.  
When “On” has been selected, the V ancillary data of the input images is also passed through at the same  
time.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-1. Selecting the video format  
One system (input/output signal) video format can be selected.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Format sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
SYS  
1 Mode↓  
HiRes↓ 16:9SQ  
Format |  
1080/59.94i|  
Off|  
Off  
1080/50i  
1080/24psf  
1080/23.98psf  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
On  
On  
480/59.94i  
576/50i  
  
Turn [F2], select the format using the Mode item, and press the [F2] switch to enter the selection.  
An asterisk () appears at the left of the format currently selected.  
Setting the 16:9 squeeze mode  
When the 16:9 squeeze mode is selected, a border width (wipe or PinP) is established that considers cases  
where SD format images are to be converted into the 16:9 aspect ratio and used.  
This setting is possible when SD is selected as the system format setting.  
On the Format sub menu, turn [F5] to select whether to support the squeeze mode using the 16:9SQ item.  
On: The squeeze mode is supported.  
Off: The squeeze mode is not supported.  
Border width (graphical representation) when the squeeze mode is supported  
Squeeze (4:3)  
16:9  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-2. Setting the crosspoints  
5-2-1. Assigning signals to the crosspoints  
External video input signals and internally generated signals can be assigned to crosspoint buttons 1 to 32.  
Displaying the assignment statuses  
  
Press the [XPT] button to light its indicator and display the XPT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Stats1-4 sub menu.  
The status of the assignment is displayed. The names of the assigned signals are abbreviated on the display.  
<Menu display>  
|
XPT  
1 XPT : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Stats1 |SIG : BK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
When one of the crosspoint buttons 1 to 32 is held down for a long time, the name of the signal assigned is  
displayed on the LCD while the button is held down.  
Example: When crosspoint button 1 is pressed (when the INPUT1 signal has been assigned to this button)  
|
XPT  
1 XPT : 1  
Stats1 |SIG :IN1  
“SHIFT” will be displayed for XPT16 when the SHIFT function has been assigned to the crosspoint 16 button.  
Assigning signals to the crosspoints  
<Menu display>  
  
Press the [XPT] button to light its indicator and  
|
|
|
|
XPT  
XPTAsign|  
5 XPT  
Signal Shift  
Sf-Lock  
Off  
display the XPT menu.  
—|  
—| Right|  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the XPTAsign sub menu.  
1~32 IN1~16  
IN-A1  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
IN-B2  
Black  
CBGD  
Off  
Left  
On  
  
Turn [F2], select the crosspoint button using the  
XPT item, turn [F3] and select the input signal  
using the Signal item.  
Changing the current assignment of the signals  
selected by the crosspoint buttons will cause  
the positions of the lighted crosspoint buttons  
to change to correspond with the assignment  
change. The images output at this time will remain  
unchanged.  
CBAR  
FMEM1~4  
PGM  
PVW  
KeyOut  
CLN  
MV1,MV2  
NoAsign  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
The table below lists the materials which can be assigned.  
Button  
Signal  
Description  
XP1 to 32  
IN1 to IN16  
SDI input 1 to 16  
Option slot  
IN-A1, IN-A2,  
IN-B1, IN-B2  
(SDI, Analog component, analog composite and DVI)  
Internally generated signal, black  
Internally generated signal, color background  
Internally generated signal, color bar  
Frame memory image  
Black  
CBGD  
CBAR  
FMEM1 to FMEM4  
CLN  
CLN (AUX only)  
PVW  
PVW (AUX only)  
PGM  
PGM (AUX only)  
KeyOut  
MV1  
KeyOut (AUX only)  
MV1 (AUX only)  
MV2  
MV2 (AUX only)  
NoAsign  
No assignment  
The image will not be changed by pressing any button to which “NoAsign” is assigned.  
If the multi view display output (MV1 or MV2) is selected as the AUX bus (AUX2, AUX3, AUX4) output signal  
when the AUX2 to AUX4 output signals have been assigned for the multi view display output (MV1 or MV2),  
a black image will be displayed as the image of the AUX bus that appears on the subscreen of the multi view  
display.  
The table below lists the default settings.  
Button  
XP1  
XP2  
XP3  
XP4  
XP5  
XP6  
XP7  
XP8  
Signal  
BLACK  
IN1  
Button  
XP9  
Signal  
IN8  
Button  
XP17  
XP18  
XP19  
XP20  
XP21  
XP22  
XP23  
XP24  
Signal  
IN15  
IN16  
IN-A1  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
INB2  
Button  
XP25  
XP26  
XP27  
XP28  
XP29  
XP30  
XP31  
XP32  
Signal  
XP10  
XP11  
XP12  
XP13  
XP14  
XP15  
XP16  
IN9  
PGM  
PVW  
KeyOut  
CLN  
IN2  
IN10  
IN11  
IN12  
IN13  
IN14  
Shift  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
MV1  
MV2  
Shift  
IN6  
IN7  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-2-2. Setting the crosspoint switching  
The timing at which the crosspoints are to be switched can be set.  
  
Press the [XPT] button to light its indicator and display the XPT menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the XPTSwch sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
XPT  
6 Timing  
XPTSwch |  
Any|  
Field1  
Field2  
  
Turn [F2], and select the switching timing using the Timing item.  
Any: The crosspoints are switched in the nearest field. This is suited to live applications.  
Field1: The crosspoints are switched in field 1. This is suited to editing applications.  
Field2: The crosspoints are switched in field 2. This is suited to editing applications.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-3. Button assignments  
5-3-1. Setting the user buttons  
The user can assign several functions which can be set using the menu items into six user buttons (USER 1 to  
USER 6).  
The user buttons light in amber when the assigned function is ON and are off when the assigned function is OFF.  
Each time the user button is pressed, the function setting alternates between ON and OFF.  
The table below lists the functions which can be assigned to the user buttons (USER 1 to USER 6).  
No.  
1
Function name  
PinPPVW  
DSK1PVW  
DSK2PVW  
Edit-EN  
Description of function  
Outputs the PinP1 and PinP2 images to the preview outputs.  
Output the DSK1 image to the preview output.  
2
3
Output the DSK2 image to the preview output.  
4
Turns the control of the editor to ON or OFF.  
5
COM-EN  
Turns the external control using the COM connector to ON or OFF.  
Enables or disables GPI-In (at the mainframe side)  
Enables or disables GPI-Out (at the mainframe side)  
Enables or disables GPI-In (at the control panel side)  
Enables or disables GPI-Out (at the control panel side)  
Turns the on-screen displays on (displayed) or off (not displayed).  
6
GPIM-In-EN  
GPIM-Out-EN  
GPIP-In-EN  
GPIP-Out-EN  
OSD  
7
8
9
10  
11  
StrFM1  
Imports the images of the AUX1 to AUX4 buses, which have been set using the FMEM menu, into  
the frame memory (FMEM1).  
12  
13  
14  
StrFM2  
StrFM3  
StrFM4  
Imports the images of the AUX1 to AUX4 buses, which have been set using the FMEM menu, into  
the frame memory (FMEM2).  
Imports the images of the AUX1 to AUX4 buses, which have been set using the FMEM menu, into  
the frame memory (FMEM3).  
Imports the images of the AUX1 to AUX4 buses, which have been set using the FMEM menu, into  
the frame memory (FMEM4).  
15  
16  
17  
SHIFT  
AUX TRAN  
NoAsign  
Switches all the A/B bus and AUX bus crosspoints between front and rear.  
Enables or disables the AUX transitions.  
No assignment  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
<Setting method>  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Button1 sub menu and Button2 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
CONFIG 8 USER1  
Button1 |PinPPVW|DSK1PVW|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
USER6  
|
USER2  
USER3  
OSD|  
CONFIG 9 USER4  
USER5  
Button2 |Edit-EN| StrFM1| SHIFT|  
DSK1PVW PinPPVW PinPPVW  
PinPPVW PinPPVW PinPPVW  
DSK1PVW DSK1PVW DSK1PVW  
DSK2PVW DSK2PVW DSK2PVW  
COM-EN Edit-EN Edit-EN  
GPIMIEN COM-EN COM-EN  
GPIMOEN GPIMIEN GPIMIEN  
GPIPIEN GPIMOEN GPIMOEN  
GPIPOEN GPIPIEN GPIPIEN  
OSD GPIPOEN GPIPOEN  
DSK2PVW DSK2PVW DSK1PVW  
Edit-EN Edit-EN DSK2PVW  
COM-EN COM-EN Edit-EN  
GPIMIEN GPIMIEN COM-EN  
GPIMOEN GPIMOEN GPIMIEN  
GPIPIEN GPIPIEN GPIMOEN  
GPIPOEN GPIPOEN GPIPIEN  
OSD  
OSD GPIPOEN  
StrFM1 StrFM1 StrFM1  
StrFM2 StrFM2 StrFM2  
StrFM3 StrFM3 StrFM3  
StrFM4 StrFM4 StrFM4  
SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT  
AUXTRAN AUXTRAN AUXTRAN  
NoAsign NoAsign NoAsign  
StrFM1  
OSD  
OSD  
StrFM2 StrFM2 StrFM1  
StrFM3 StrFM3 StrFM2  
StrFM4 StrFM4 StrFM3  
SHIFT SHIFT StrFM4  
AUXTRAN AUXTRAN AUXTRAN  
NoAsign NoAsign NoAsign  
Button1 sub menu  
  
Turn [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 1 button using the USER1 item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 2 button using the USER2 item.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 3 button using the USER3 item.  
Button2 sub menu  
  
Turn [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 4 button using the USER4 item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 5 button using the USER5 item.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the USER 6 button using the USER6 item.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-4. Setting the date and time  
The user can set the date and time to be used as the SD memory card’s time stamp.  
Be absolutely sure to set them when an SD memory card is to be used.  
Setting the date  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Date sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to set the year using the Year item.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the month using the Month item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the day using the Date item.  
  
Press the [F5] switch to enter the year/month/day.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
10 Year  
Month  
Date  
Set↓  
Date  
|
—|  
—|  
—|  
2000  
1~12  
1~31  
|
2099  
Setting the time  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Time sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to set the hour using the Hour item.  
  
Turn [F3] to set the minutes using the Minute item.  
  
Turn [F4] to set the seconds using the Second item.  
  
Press the [F5] switch to enter the hour/minutes/seconds.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
Time  
11 Hour  
Minute Second Set↓  
—| —|  
|
—|  
0~23  
0~59 0~59  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-5. Network settings  
Proceed with the network settings to perform such tasks as updating the software version via LAN.  
The network initial setup is: IP address: 192.168.0.10, subnet mask: 255.255.255.0.  
When using the host computer with settings matching the network setup, it is not necessary to setup via the  
menu.  
For the setting to take effect, the system must be rebooted. Turn the system’s power off and then back on.  
Setting the IP address  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Network1 sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to [F5] to set the IP address, and press the [F5] switch (Save) to enter the address.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
SYS  
7 IP Address  
192|  
Save↓  
1
NetWork1|  
168|  
0|  
0~255 0~255 0~255 0~255  
Setting the subnet mask  
  
On the SYSTEM menu, turn [F1] to display the Network2 sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to [F5] to set the subnet mask, and press the [F5] switch (Save) to enter the mask.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
SYS  
8 Subnet Mask  
255|  
Save↓  
0
NetWork2|  
255|  
255|  
0~255 0~255 0~255 0~255  
Display the MAC address  
  
On the SYSTEM menu, turn [F1] to display the Network3 sub menu.  
The MAC address now appears.  
<Menu display> (When the MAC address is “008045448000”.)  
|
SYS  
9 MAC Address  
NetWork3| 008045448000  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-6. Other settings  
Setting the LCD backlight  
The LCD backlight can be set to ON or OFF.  
It is also possible to automatically turn off the LCD backlight when no control panel operation is performed within a  
set time interval.  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CONFIG 1 BusMode LCD-BL MENUDLG  
Operate |PGM/PST|  
A/B  
On|  
On|  
Off  
Off  
60  
120  
180  
  
Turn [F3] to select the setting for the backlight in the LCD-BL item.  
On: Backlight is turned on all the time.  
Off: Backlight is turned off all the time.  
60, 120, 180:  
When no control panel operation is performed within a set time interval (60 minutes, 120 minutes,  
180 minutes), the LCD backlight is turned off automatically.  
Even when the set time interval elapses and the LCD backlight is turned off, the backlight comes  
back on when a control operation is performed.  
Menu delegation settings  
The enable/disable setting for the menu delegation function is selected.  
  
Turn [F4] to select the enable/disable setting for the menu delegation function in the MENUDLG item.  
On: Enabled, Off: Disabled  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-7. External device control  
5-7-1. Enable/Disable Setting for Control of External Devices  
Set up the control of the external devices (editor, pan-tilt head and/or controller) that have been connected to the  
RS-422 connector.  
  
Press the [CTL] button to light its indicator and display the CTL menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the RS422 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
CTL  
RS422  
1 Edit-EN COM-EN  
| Enable| Enable|  
Disable Disable  
  
Turn [F2] and use the Edit-EN item to set up the control of the unit from the external device (editor)that has  
been connected to the EDITOR connector.  
Enable: Control is enabled.  
Disable: Control is disabled.  
  
Turn [F3] and use the COM-EN item to set up the control of the external device (pan-tilt head, controller) that  
has been connected to the COM connector.  
Enable: Control is enabled.  
Disable: Control is disabled.  
The Edit-EN item and COM-EN item settings can be assigned to user buttons.  
Refer to “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-7-2. Editor control  
The following lists the functions which can be controlled by editing controller AG-A850.  
(Compliant with the GVG protocol)  
• Read command  
• Crosspoint switch  
• Wipe pattern selection (BKGD)  
Transition mode (MIX/WIPE) selection  
• Auto transition time setting  
• Auto transition execution  
<Table of wipe patterns supported>  
GVG  
protocol  
GVG  
protocol  
22  
GVG  
protocol  
43  
GVG  
protocol  
64  
AV-HS450N  
AV-HS450N  
AV-HS450N  
AV-HS450N  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
WIPE #1  
WIPE #2  
WIPE #3  
WIPE #4  
WIPE #5  
WIPE #6  
WIPE #7  
WIPE #8  
WIPE #9  
WIPE #10  
WIPE #11  
WIPE #12  
SQ1 #1  
SQ1 #2  
SQ1 #3  
SQ1 #4  
SQ1 #5  
SQ1 #6  
SQ1 #7  
SQ1 #8  
SQ1 #9  
SQ1 #10  
3D1 #7  
3D1 #8  
3D1 #9  
3D1 #10  
3D1 #11  
3D1 #12  
SQ2 #2  
SQ2 #4  
SQ2 #6  
SQ2 #8  
SL2 #4  
SL2 #6  
SL2 #8  
SD2 #2  
SD2 #4  
SD2 #6  
SD2 #8  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
SQ1 #12  
SL1 #1  
SL1 #2  
SL1 #3  
SL1 #4  
SL1 #5  
SL1 #6  
SL1 #7  
SL1 #8  
SL1 #9  
3D1 #1  
3D1 #2  
3D1 #3  
3D1 #4  
3D1 #5  
3D1 #6  
39  
40  
41  
42  
60  
61  
62  
63  
SL2 #2  
81  
82  
83  
84  
On the RS422 sub menu of the CTL menu, set On or Off for control from the external device (editor) connected to  
the RS-422 connector.  
For details on the settings, see “5-7-1. Enable/Disable Setting for Control of External Devices”.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-7-3. Setting the GPI  
The user can set the functions that are to be controlled from the GPI ports and set whether to enable the control.  
Refer to “6-2-4. TALLY/GPI” and “6-3-1. TALLY/GPI”.  
  
Press the [CONFIG] button to light its indicator and display the CONFIG menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the sub menu corresponding to the TALLY/GPI connector concerned and set the function  
to be controlled by the GPI port.  
TALLY/GPI connector of mainframe:  
GPIM-In sub menu and GPIM-Out sub menu  
<Menu display>  
CONFIG 4 Port  
GPIM-In |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GPIEN  
|Disable  
Assign  
—|NoAsign|  
GPIEN  
CONFIG 5 Port  
Assign  
—|NoAsign|  
|Disable  
GPIM-Out|  
Port1~8  
Enable  
Port1  
Enable  
|
Port31  
TALLY/GPI connector of control panel:  
GPIP-In sub menu and GPIP-Out sub menu  
<Menu display>  
CONFIG 6 Port  
GPIP-In |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GPIEN  
|Disable  
Assign  
—|NoAsign|  
GPIEN  
CONFIG 7 Port  
GPIP-Out|  
Assign  
—|NoAsign|  
|Disable  
Port1~8  
Enable  
Port1~8  
Enable  
  
Turn [F2] to select the port to be controlled using the Port item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the function to be assigned using the Assign item.  
Refer to “Control using the GPI input port” and “Output from the GPI output port”.  
  
Turn [F5] to set enable or disable for the control to be exercised from each port using the GPIEN item.  
Enable: Control is enabled.  
Disable: Control is disabled.  
Settings for the GPIEN item can be assigned to one of the user buttons.  
See “5-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Control using the GPI input port  
Assign Item  
AUTO  
Description of function assigned  
Control method  
AUTO button in transition area  
CUT button in transition area  
CUT  
DSK1  
DSK1 button in transition area  
DSK2 button in transition area  
PinP1 button in transition area  
PinP2 button in transition area  
FTB button in transition area  
DSK2  
PinP1  
Operations are performed using  
contact inputs (30ms or more).  
PinP2  
FTB  
BGDAUTO  
BGDCUT  
KEYAUTO  
KEYCUT  
RTlyDBL  
GTlyDBL  
NoAsign  
AUTO button when the background is selected  
CUT button when the background is selected  
AUTO button when the key is selected  
CUT button when the key is selected  
Red tally signal is not output  
Functions are enabled using contact  
inputs (or disabled in open status).  
Green tally signal is not output  
No function assigned  
Output from the GPI output port  
Assign Item  
CUT  
Description of function assigned  
Output  
Cut transition executed  
KEYON  
Key transition start  
DSK1ON  
DSK2ON  
PinP1ON  
PinP2ON  
FTBON  
DSK1 transition start  
DSK2 transition start  
Low pulses are output  
(approx. 50 to 60 ms).  
PinP1 transition start  
PinP2 transition start  
FTB transition start  
BGDCUT  
KEYCUT  
AUTO  
Cut transition for the background executed  
Cut transition for a key executed  
Auto transition execution in progress  
Auto transition execution in progress for background  
Auto transition execution in progress for key  
Transition execution in progress for key  
Transition execution in progress for DSK1  
Transition execution in progress for DSK2  
Transition execution in progress for PinP1  
Transition execution in progress for PinP2  
Transition execution in progress for FTB  
Red tally for INPUT1 to 20  
BGDAUTO  
KEYAUTO  
KEYTRN  
DSK1TRN  
DSK2TRN  
PinP1TRN  
PinP2TRN  
FTBTRN  
R-Tly1 to 20  
G-Tly1 to 20  
NoAsign  
A low level is output.  
A low level is output during tally  
output.  
Green tally for INPUT1 to 20  
No function assigned  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-7-4. Camera control  
A camera and pan-tilt head can be controlled from this unit.  
Up to five cameras can be controlled via a controller (AW-RP655N or AW-RP555N) connected to the unit’s COM  
connector.  
The unit can also be connected directly to a pan-tilt head, and the camera and pan-tilt head can be controlled.  
To control a camera in this way, select “P/TCont” or “P/TDirt” as the Protcol item setting.  
Be absolutely sure that the power of the equipment is turned off before proceeding to connect the cables.  
Functions that can be controlled from the unit  
Switching of the cameras to be controlled in line with the selection of the crosspoint buttons (PGM/A 1 to 32 and  
PST/B 1 to 32).  
The camera and pan-tilt head’s pan-tilt operations and zooming and focusing operations are controlled.  
The operations for the setting menus of the camera are performed.  
When the unit is connected directly to a pan-tilt head, the red tally signal and power on/off are controlled from  
the COM connector.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Example of connections (when the unit and a controller are connected)  
Controllers that can be connected: AW-RP655N, AW-RP555N  
For details on connecting the pan-tilt heads and controller or connecting the pan-tilt heads and cameras, refer to  
the operating instructions of each device.  
Video signals  
Camera  
Control signals  
Pan-tilt head  
REMOTE/SERVICE  
connector  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
IN1  
IN2  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
CM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
LAN  
PANEL  
TALLY/GPI  
AV-HS450N  
AW-RP655N  
COM connector  
RS-422RS-232C  
converter  
Cable length: Max. 656 ft. (200 m)  
Twisted pair cable (AWG24)  
Cable length: Max. 32.8 ft. (10 m)  
<Connection specifications>  
AV-HS450N  
AW-RP655N  
RS-422RS-232C  
Pin No.  
Signal  
FRAME GND  
RXD –  
Pin No.  
Signal  
converter  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TXD –  
RXD  
RXD IN  
TXD OUT  
DTR  
TXD +  
GND  
TXD  
DTR  
GND  
TXD +  
GND  
NC  
GND  
RXD +  
TXD –  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RXD +  
RXD –  
FRAME GND  
6
9
For pin assignments and specifications  
of the RS-422RS-232C converter,  
refer to the operating instructions of  
the converter used.  
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
COM  
REMOTE/SERVICE  
5
1
: Twisted pair cable  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Example of connections (when the unit and a pan-tilt head are connected)  
Pan-tilt heads that can be connected: AW-HE100N, AW-PH400P, AW-PH405N, AW-PH360N  
Connections for AW-HE100N, AW-PH405N or AW-PH360N  
Analog component signals  
(For the connection specifications, refer to the  
Operating Instructions of the AW-HE100N.)  
Analog Input Board  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN
ANALOG INPUTS  
IN1  
IN2  
Y
Pb  
Pr  
Y
Pb  
Pr  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
AW-HE100N  
LAN  
PANEL  
TALLY/GPI  
AV-HS450N  
COM connector  
CONTROLLER connector  
Cable length: Max. 656 ft. (200 m)  
Twisted pair cable (AWG24)  
<Connection specifications>  
AV-HS450N  
AW-HE100N, AW-PH405N, AW-PH360N  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Pin No.  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FRAME GND  
RXD –  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND  
TXD +  
GND  
NC  
GND  
RXD +  
TXD –  
RXD –  
TXD –  
TXD +  
RXD +  
FRAME GND  
: Twisted pair cable  
5
4
3
2
1
CONTROLLER  
(CONTROL IN IP/RP)  
9
8
7
6
COM  
1.......8  
When the AW-HE100N is to be connected to the unit, select a setting which will enable operations to be  
controlled by the controller in the “Controller” item of the AW-HE100N’s pan-tilt head unit setting menu ( Pan  
Tilt Head Setting ).  
For further details, refer to the Operating Instructions of the AW-HE100N.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Connections for AW-PH400P  
CONTROL IN IP/RP connector  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
IN1  
IN2  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
LAN  
PANEL  
TALLY/GPI  
AV-HS450N  
AW-PH400P  
COM connector  
Cable length: Max. 656 ft. (200 m)  
Twisted pair cable (AWG24)  
Cable length: Max. 1640 ft. (500 m)  
10Base-T straight cable  
(UTP category 5)  
AW-IF400G  
Switch settings  
SET UP  
SW1 SW2  
1
2
3
4
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
(300 deg) (190 deg)  
<Connection specifications>  
AV-HS450N  
AW-IF400G  
Pin No.  
Signal  
FRAME GND  
RXD –  
Pin No.  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND  
TXD +  
GND  
NC  
GND  
RXD +  
TXD –  
RXD –  
TXD –  
TXD +  
RXD +  
FRAME GND  
: Twisted pair cable  
5
4
3
2
1
CONTROLLER  
9
8
7
6
COM  
8.......1  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Camera control settings  
Five cameras can be controlled either through the controller that is used for the camera (AW-RP555N or  
AW-RP655N) connected to the COM connector, or through the controller that is used for the pan-tilt head.  
  
Press the [CAM] button to light its indicator and display the CAM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the CamCTL1 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
Protcol  
CAM  
1 CTL  
Signal Tally  
None|Disable|P/TCont  
CamCTL1 |  
1|  
1~5 IN1~16 Enable P/TDirt  
IN-A1  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
IN-B2  
  
Turn [F2] to set the control signal (for the camera) that supports the input signal using the CTL item.  
Establish the associations between the switching of the cameras linked to the selection of the crosspoint  
buttons (PGM/A 1 to 32 and PST/B 1 to 32) and the tally control.  
When camera control is enabled, the “c” mark appears on the multi view display in front of the names of  
the materials in the cameras targeted for control.  
When “P/TDirt” has been selected as the Protcol item, only “1” appears.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the input signal using the Signal item.  
  
Turn [F4] to enable or disable tally control using the Tally item.  
This setting can be selected when “P/TDirt” has been selected as the Protcol item.  
Enable: Tally control is enabled.  
Red tally signal On/Off control is exercised from the RS-422 interface connector.  
Disable: Tally control is disabled.  
  
Turn [F5] to set the device to be controlled using the Protcol item.  
P/TCont: The controller for the camera or controller for the pan-tilt head is controlled.  
Select this when the controller is to be connected to the unit and a multiple number of cameras  
and/or pan-tilt heads are to be controlled.  
P/TDirt: Select this when a pan-tilt head is to be connected directly to the unit and the camera and the  
pan-tilt head are to be controlled.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
  
Turn [F1] to display the CamCTL2 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CAM  
2 CTL  
PosCont PTSpeed Power↓  
CamCTL2 |  
1|PanTilt|  
Fast|  
On  
1~5 Zm/Focs Middle  
Slow  
Off  
  
Turn [F2] to set the camera to be controlled using the CTL item.  
  
Turn [F3] to select the control to be exercised by operating the positioner using the PosCont item.  
PanTilt: Panning is controlled by left/right (X) operation; tilting is controlled by up/down (Y) operation.  
Zm/Focs: Lens focusing is controlled by left/right (X) operation; lens zooming is controlled by up/down  
(Y) operation.  
Each time the rotary encoder [Z] is pressed, the PanTilt or Zm/Focs setting is selected alternately.  
Control of lens focusing is possible when the  
lens focus of the camera is set to manual  
operation.  
For switching between  
PanTilt and Zm/Focs  
If the crosspoint buttons (PGM/A 1 to 32  
Z
and PST/B 1 to 32) are held down when “P/  
TCont” or “P/TDirt” is selected as the Protcol  
item setting, delegation to the CamCTL2  
menu is initiated.  
For controlling the tilting  
For controlling the lens  
zooming  
POSITIONER  
For controlling the panning  
For controlling the lens focusing  
Turn [F4] to set the control (panning, tilting, lens focusing and lens zooming) speed using the PTSpeed Item.  
Fast: Control is exercised at the fastest speed.  
Middle: Control is exercised at the medium speed.  
(This cannot be selected for the control of lens focusing or lens zooming.)  
Slow: Control is exercised at the slowest speed.  
When controlling the pan-tilt head’s power to On, turn [F5] to select On, and press the [F5] switch.  
When controlling it to Off, turn [F5] to select Off, and press the [F5] switch.  
After turning the pan-tilt head’s power to On, make sure to use this operation to turn the selection On.  
This setting can be performed when "P/TDirt" has been selected as the Protocol item setting on the  
CamCTL1 sub menu.  
The menu display (On or Off) does not indicate the status of the camera.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
Camera's menu operations  
The camera's menu displays, the movements of the cursor displayed on the menus and the entry of the changes  
made can be performed from the unit.  
  
Press the [CAM] button to light its indicator and display the CAM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the CamCTL3 sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
CAM  
3 CTL  
C-Menu↓ Item  
Val/Y/N  
CamCTL3 |  
1|  
—|  
—|  
1~5  
On Cursor Cursor  
Off  
  
Turn [F2] to set the camera to be controlled using the CTL item.  
  
If the camera's menus are to be displayed, turn [F3] to select On, and then press the [F3] switch. If they are  
not to be displayed, turn [F3] to select Off and then press the [F3] switch.  
When On has been selected, "Cursor" is displayed in the Item and Val/Y/N items.  
  
The cursor displayed on the camera's menus can now be moved by turning [F4]. Turn [F4] clockwise to move  
the cursor down or counterclockwise to move it up.  
  
Turn [F5] clockwise to move to the camera’s setup screen.  
Operation of [F5] in the setup screen  
SelectingYes/No:  
Turn clockwise to select “Yes (confirmed)” and turn counterclockwise to select “No (unconfirmed)”.  
Changing values:  
Turn clockwise to increase and turn counterclockwise to decrease.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-8. Status displays  
5-8-1. Alarm status displays  
The alert status (alarms) for this unit’s power supply and cooling fan are displayed on the LCD.  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light it, and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Alarm sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
Fan  
|
|
|
SYS  
Alarm  
5 Power  
|NoAlarm|NoAlarm|  
Alarm Alarm  
The alert status of the power supplies (mainframe and control panel) is displayed in the Power item.  
The alert status of the cooling fan (mainframe) is displayed in the Fan item.  
NoAlarm: No irregularity  
Alarm:  
Irregularity  
5-8-2. Alarm message  
A message is displayed on the LCD when an alarm has occurred.  
Alarm message displayed  
ALARM ! FAN STOP  
Type of trouble  
Cooling fan stopped (mainframe)  
Power supply voltage drop (mainframe)  
Operation  
ALARM ! MF POWER FAILURE  
ALARM ! MF POWER FAILURE &  
FAN STOP  
Power supply voltage drop and cooling fan  
stopped (mainframe)  
ALARM ! PANEL POWER FAILURE  
Power supply voltage drop (control panel)  
The alarm message disappears  
when a menu operation is  
performed.  
ALARM ! PANEL POWER FAILURE & Power supply voltage drop (control panel) and  
FAN STOP  
cooling fan stopped (mainframe)  
ALARM ! PANEL & MF POWER  
FAILURE  
Power supply voltage drop (control panel and  
mainframe)  
ALARM ! PANEL & MF POWER  
FAILURE & FAN STOP  
Power supply voltage drop (control panel  
and mainframe) and cooling fan stopped  
(mainframe)  
ALARM ! VER IS DISAGREEMENT  
PANEL-Ver[] MF-Ver[xxxxxxx]  
Mainframe and control panel versions do not  
match  
Recovery is not possible without  
matching the versions of the  
mainframe and control panel.  
No operations can be performed  
from the control panel until versions  
are matched up.  
ALARM ! LAN CONNECTION  
ERROR  
LAN communication malfunction between  
mainframe and control panel  
The message remains displayed  
and no operations can be performed  
from the control panel until the  
trouble is remedied and normal  
operation is restored.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-8-3. Displaying the version information and option information  
Information on the unit’s software and hardware versions  
and the statuses of the options are displayed.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
12 Select Version  
SysVer  
|1.00.00  
MainVer | MFSoft|  
1.00|  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator  
PnlSoft  
PnlFPGA  
CntFPGA  
In1FPGA  
In2FPGA  
M/EFPGA  
OutFPGA  
and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the MainVer sub menu.  
  
Turn [F2] to select the item whose version is to be  
displayed using the Select item.  
  
The version information is displayed in the Version item.  
The system version information is displayed in the SysVer item.  
MFSoft  
PnlSoft  
Software version of mainframe  
Software version of control panel  
In1FPGA  
In2FPGA  
Hardware version of input circuit board 1  
(mainframe)  
Hardware version of input circuit board 2  
(mainframe)  
PnlFPGA Hardware version of control panel  
M/EFPGA Hardware version of M/E circuit board  
(mainframe)  
CntFPGA Hardware version of control circuit board  
OutFPGA  
Hardware version of output circuit board  
(mainframe)  
(mainframe)  
  
Turn [F1] to display the OptVer sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
SYS  
13 Select Board  
Version  
0001|  
OptVer | SLOTA| SDI-IN|  
SLOTB  
  
Turn [F2] to select the option slot using the Select item.  
SLOTA: Option slot A  
SLOTB: Option slot B  
  
The types of the optional boards connected are displayed in the Board item.  
SDI-IN  
Ana-IN  
DVI-IN  
DVID-IN  
Csit-IN  
SDI input board  
SDI-OUT  
Ana-OUT  
D/A-OUT  
None  
SDI output board  
Analog input board  
DVI input board  
Analog output board  
DVI/analog output board  
No optional board  
Full-HD DVI input board  
Analog composite input board  
  
The optional board version information is displayed in the Version item.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System settings  
5-9. Initialization  
5-9-1. Initializing Setting Data  
Initialization returns the set data to the factory shipment status.  
(The network settings and the date and time settings are not initialized.)  
  
Press the [SYSTEM] button to light its indicator and display the SYSTEM menu.  
Refer to “2-1-5. LCD menu area”.  
  
Turn [F1] to display the Initial sub menu.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SYS  
6 Init↓  
F Init↓  
Initial |  
  
Press [F2] to initialize the settings. The “Init?” message appears.  
  
To initialize the settings, turn [F2] to select YES, and then press the [F2] switch.  
To cancel the initialization, turn [F2] to select No, and then press the [F2] switch.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
SYS  
6 Init↓  
F Init↓  
Initial |  
No|  
YES  
5-9-2. Initializing Fader  
The range for executing a transition can be initialized by operating the fader lever.  
Initialization should be performed when transitions are not completed to the end even when the fader lever has  
been moved as far as it will go.  
  
Press [F3] in the Initial sub menu to perform initialization.  
The "F Init?” message is displayed.  
<Menu display>  
|
|
|
|
|
|
SYS  
6 Init↓  
F Init↓  
No|  
Initial |  
YES  
  
When initializing, turn [F3] to select “Yes” and press the [F3] switch.  
When not initializing, turn [F3] to select “No” and press the [F3] switch.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. External interfaces  
6-1. Connecting the control panel and mainframe  
Connect the MAIN FRAME connector on the control panel and PANEL connector on the mainframe using the  
CAT5E cable supplied.  
CAT5E, straight cable, STP (shielded twisted pair), 10 m  
Provide the cable below if the control panel and mainframe are installed in a location where the CAT5E cable  
provided is not long enough to connect them (where the distance between the control panel and mainframe is  
more than 10 meters).  
CAT5E, straight cable or crossover cable, STP (shielded twisted pair), max. 100 m  
6-2. Mainframe  
6-2-1. LAN  
Connect the host computer to the LAN connector on the mainframe when the image transfer function is to be  
used. Provide the cable below to connect the host computer.  
CAT5E, straight cable or crossover cable, STP (shielded twisted pair), max. 100 m  
For details on the image transfer settings, refer to “7. Image transmission functions”.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. External interfaces  
6-2-2. EDITOR  
The unit can be controlled by an external device by connecting the device to the EDITOR connector.  
Use it with the settings below.  
Baud rate: 38400 bps  
Parity: ODD  
RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
FRAME GROUND  
TXD –  
Description of signal  
Frame ground  
Send data (–)  
Receive data (+)  
Ground  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Stop bit: 1 bit  
5
4
3
2
1
RXD +  
GROUND  
NC  
9
8
7
6
Not used  
Ground  
Send data (+)  
Receive data (–)  
Frame ground  
GROUND  
TXD +  
RXD –  
FRAME GROUND  
6-2-3. COM  
One or more Panasonic pan-tilt head systems can be controlled by the unit by connecting the system to the COM  
connector.  
For details on the connections, refer to “5-7-4. Camera control”.  
RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw  
5
4
3
2
1
Pin No.  
Signal name  
FRAME GROUND  
RXD –  
Description of signal  
Frame ground  
Receive data (–)  
Send data (+)  
Ground  
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TXD +  
GROUND  
NC  
Not used  
Ground  
Receive data (+)  
Send data (–)  
Frame ground  
GROUND  
RXD +  
TXD –  
FRAME GROUND  
The pin assignment is different from that of the EDITOR connector.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. External interfaces  
6-2-4. TALLY/GPI  
This connector is provided with eight contact input ports (GPI In) for controlling the unit from an external device,  
31 ports (GPI Out) for outputting the tally and status information from the unit to the external device, and one port  
(ALARM Out) that is used exclusively as the alarm output.  
For details of the settings, refer to “5-7-3. Setting the GPI”.  
D-sub 50-pin, female, inch screw  
17  
50  
1
Pin No.  
Signal name  
33  
18  
1
2
GPI In Com  
34 GPI In Com  
GPI In 1  
34  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
GPI In 2  
Example of GPI Out and ALARM connections  
Ensure that the conditions given below are satisfied.  
35 GPI In 3  
GPI In 4  
GPI In 5  
36 GPI In 6  
GPI In 7  
GPI In 8  
37 GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 1  
GPI Out 2  
38 GPI Out 3  
GPI Out 4  
IN  
3
Dielectric strength: Max. DC 24 V  
Current:  
Max. 50 mA  
4
AV-HS450N  
(Max. voltage: 24 V)  
Tally LED  
5
A
B
C
D
E
F
GPI Out  
ALARM Out  
6
GPI Out Com  
39 GPI Out 5  
GPI Out 6  
(Max. current: 50 mA)  
Com  
7
GPI Out 7  
40 GPI Out 8  
GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 9  
41 GPI Out 10  
GPI Out 11  
GPI Out 12  
42 GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 13  
GPI Out 14  
43 GPI Out 15  
GPI Out 16  
GPI Out Com  
44 GPI Out 17  
GPI Out 18  
8
Example of GPI In connections  
Provide contact inputs.  
9
AV-HS450N  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
+3.3 V  
GPI In  
Com  
GPI Out 19  
45 GPI Out 20  
GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 21  
46 GPI Out 22  
GPI Out 23  
GPI Out 24  
47 GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 25  
GPI Out 26  
48 GPI Out 27  
GPI Out 28  
GPI Out Com  
49 GPI Out 29  
GPI Out 30  
G
H
GPI Out 31  
50 ALARM Out  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. External interfaces  
6-3. Control panel  
6-3-1. TALLY/GPI  
This connector is provided with eight contact input ports (GPI In) for controlling the unit from an external device,  
8 ports (GPI Out) for outputting the tally and status information from the unit to the external device, and one port  
(ALARM Out) that is used exclusively as the alarm output.  
For details of the settings, refer to “5-7-3. Setting the GPI”.  
D-sub 25-pin, female, inch screw  
13  
1
Pin No.  
Signal name  
1
2
GPI In Com  
GPI In Com  
GPI In 1  
14  
14  
25  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
GPI In 2  
GPI In 3  
GPI In 4  
GPI In 5  
GPI In 6  
GPI In 7  
GPI In 8  
GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 1  
GPI Out 2  
GPI Out 3  
GPI Out 4  
GPI Out Com  
GPI Out 5  
GPI Out 6  
GPI Out 7  
GPI Out 8  
DC 5 V  
Example of GPI Out and ALARM connections  
Ensure that the conditions given below are satisfied.  
3
IN  
4
Dielectric strength: Max. DC 24 V  
Current:  
Max. 50 mA  
5
6
AV-HS450N  
(Max. voltage: 24 V)  
Tally LED  
7
A
B
GPI Out  
8
ALARM Out  
(Max. current: 50 mA)  
9
Com  
10  
11  
12  
13  
DC 5 V  
NC  
ALARM Com  
ALARM Out  
Example of GPI In connections  
Provide contact inputs.  
AV-HS450N  
+3.3 V  
GPI In  
Com  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Image transmission functions  
This unit comes with a function for transmitting still images from the host computer to the unit via LAN and a  
function for importing still images from the unit into the host computer. The image transmission software must be  
installed in the host computer from the CD-ROM supplied in order to use these functions.  
For details on installation, refer to “How to install the software”.  
Specifications  
Run the image transmission software (HS450 Tool) in a host computer which satisfies the following conditions.  
• Operating system: Windows 2000 or Windows XP  
• Processor:  
• RAM:  
Pentium III, 1 GHz or better recommended  
256 MB or more recommended  
• Hard disk drive:  
• LAN:  
At least 50 MB of free memory  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T  
• Display:  
TrueColor (24 bit, 32 bit color), 800 600 dots or more  
The image formats supported include bitmap (bmp), JPEG (jpg), TIFF (tif), GIF (gif) and PNG (png).  
The image transmission software is equipped with a function for automatically converting images into the specified  
video format size.  
Connections  
Connect the LAN connector on the mainframe to the host computer using the LAN cable. The LAN connector  
comes with an Auto-MDI/MDI-X function. Use a LAN straight cable or LAN crossover cable for the connection.  
For details on network setup such as IP addresses, refer to “5-5. Network settings”.  
SLOT  
A
SLOT  
B
IN/OUT A1  
IN/OUT A2  
IN/OUT B1  
IN/OUT B2  
IN1  
SDI INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
C/C  
U/C  
IN2  
SIGNAL  
GND  
EDITOR  
COM  
REF  
SDI OUTPUTS  
1
DVI-D OUTPUTS  
5
2
3
4
6
TALLY/GPI  
LAN  
PANEL  
LAN cable  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Image transmission functions  
How to install the software  
This section describes how to install the image transmission software (HS450 Tool).  
Windows XP is used as the host computer’s operating system in the example given here.  
1. Insert the CD-ROM supplied with the unit into the CD-ROM drive of the host computer in which the  
program will be installed. (Here, E: will serve as the name of this drive for example.)  
2. Execute the setup program (E:\HS450TOOL\ENG\SETUP.EXE).  
3. The installer now starts up so follow its instructions to proceed.  
4. The Setup Complete screen appears to indicate that installation is complete.  
Click [Finish] to close the window.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Image transmission functions  
Operation  
This section describes how to operate the image transmission software (HS450 Tool).  
<Startup>  
On the Start menu of Windows, select [Programs] [Panasonic] [AV-HS450Tool] [HS450Tool].  
The main screen now appears.  
<Exit>  
Click the [CLOSE] button.  
<Setting the IP address>  
Set the unit’s IP address in the IP Address setting box.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Image transmission functions  
<Transmitting images to the unit>  
1. Select the mode.  
Check that “To HS450” appears in the [Mode] field.  
If “From HS450” appears instead, click the [From HS450] button so that “To HS450” appears.  
2. Select the transmission destination of the images in the [Target] field.  
FMEM1: Unit’s frame memory 1  
FMEM2: Unit’s frame memory 2  
FMEM3: Unit’s frame memory 3  
FMEM4: Unit’s frame memory 4  
3. When the [Select Image] button is clicked, the file selection dialog box appears on the screen.  
Select the image file to be transmitted, and click [OK].  
The image is now displayed in the image display area, and its horizontal and vertical dimensions appear in  
the [Width] and [Height] fields at the bottom right.  
4. In the [Size] field, select the size of the image to be transmitted to the unit.  
HD1080 (19201080), HD720 (1280720), SD480 (720487) or SD576 (720576) can be selected as  
the size. If the image is in a different video format from the ones supported by the unit, the output will not  
be displayed properly.  
5. In the [Aspect] field, select the scaling method.  
If the size of the image to be transmitted and the selected image differ, the image will be automatically  
scaled according to one of the following methods.  
Full: The size of the image is increased or reduced so that it fits the size selected in the [Size] field. If  
the aspect ratio of the image to be transmitted differs from that of the selected image, the ratio  
between the horizontal and vertical dimensions will be changed.  
Keep: The image is expanded or reduced while its original aspect ratio is kept unchanged.  
Any empty spaces in the image will appear black.  
6. The [RGBA(1&2or3&4)] button can be selected when images containing the alpha channel are to be  
transmitted.  
Click the [RGBA(1&2or3&4)] button and select “FMEM1” in the [Target] field to transmit the RGB images to  
frame memory 1 (FMEM1) and the alpha channel images to frame memory 2 (FMEM2).  
Selecting “FMEM3” in the [Target] field to transmit the RGB images to frame memory 3 (FMEM3) and the  
alpha channel images to frame memory 4 (FMEM4).  
When the [Display Alpha] button is clicked, the alpha channel images appear as a preview display.  
7. When the [Send] button is clicked, images are transmitted to the unit and images are saved in frame  
memory and flash memory.  
The [Wright Flash] button is always in the selected status.  
When not saving images in the flash memory, click the [Wright Flash] button to deselect the [Wright  
Flash] button.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Image transmission functions  
<Transmitting images from the unit>  
1. Select the mode.  
Check that “From HS450” appears in the [Mode] field.  
If “To HS450” appears instead, click the [To HS450] button so that “From HS450” appears.  
2. Select the images to be imported to the host computer in the [Target] field.  
FMEM1: Images in unit’s frame memory 1  
FMEM2: Images in unit’s frame memory 2  
FMEM3: Images in unit’s frame memory 3  
FMEM4: Images in unit’s frame memory 4  
3. When the [Get] button is clicked, the image is imported from the unit.  
The image is now displayed in the image display area, and its horizontal and vertical dimensions appear in  
the Width and Height fields at the bottom right.  
4. When the [Save Image] button is clicked, the file save dialog box appears on the screen. Select the image  
file to be transmitted, and click [Save].  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
A setting is entered when an item displayed () is selected and then the [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4] or [F5] switch is  
pressed.  
(It will not be entered unless the switch is pressed.)  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
KEY  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
KEY  
KEY  
1
Parameter  
Type  
LumKey  
Fill  
PVW  
Setting range  
Lum, Linear,  
Chroma, Full  
Linear  
ChrmOn, ChrmOff Bus, Matte  
Auto, Off, On  
Default value  
Parameter  
ChrmOff  
Gain  
Bus  
Auto  
KEY  
2
3
Clip  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Adjust  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
KEY  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load  
FillMatt  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
KEY  
4
Type  
Width  
Direc  
Edge  
Setting range  
Off, Border, Drop, 0 to 4  
Shadow, Outline  
0, 45, 90, 135, 180,  
225, 270, 315  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
2
0
KEY  
5
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
EdgeCol  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
KEY  
6
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
CopyTo ↓  
WIPEPos  
Setting range  
−100.00 to 100.00 −100.00 to 100.00  
Displays the copy  
destination.  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
KEY  
7
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
CopyTo ↓  
SQPos  
Setting range  
−100.00 to 100.00 −100.00 to 100.00  
Displays the copy  
destination.  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
KEY  
8
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
FlyKEY  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−100.00 to 100.00 −100.00 to 100.00 0.0 to 400.0  
0.00  
0.00  
100.0  
KEY  
9
Light  
Modify  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On, Off  
Off  
KEY 10  
Mask  
Mask  
Invert  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off, Manual, 4:3  
Off  
On, Off  
Off  
KEY  
KEY 11  
MaskAdj  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
OutPatt  
Nor, Rev  
Nor  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
KEY 12  
Trans  
Setting range  
Default value  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
CHR KEY CHRKEY 1  
AutoCmp  
Parameter  
AutCmp ↓  
RESET ↓  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
CHRKEY 2  
Sample1  
View  
Mode  
UNDO ↓  
Setting range  
Cmpsit, Matte,  
Proc.FG, FG  
Cmpsit  
SelBG, Cln.BG,  
Cln.FG, Spl.Spg  
SelBG  
Default value  
Parameter  
CHRKEY 3  
Sample2  
View  
Mode  
UNDO ↓  
Setting range  
Cmpsit, Matte,  
Proc.FG, FG  
Spill–, Spill+,  
Matte–, Matte+,  
Detail–, Detail+,  
MatSpng,  
MkFGTrn, RstrDtl  
Default value  
Parameter  
Cmpsit  
Spill–  
CHRKEY 4  
FineTun  
View  
Spill  
Trans  
Detail  
Setting range  
Cmpsit, Matte,  
Proc.FG, FG  
Cmpsit  
–1000 to 1000  
–1000 to 1000  
–1000 to 1000  
Default value  
Parameter  
0
0
0
PinP1  
PinP1 1  
PinP1  
Shape  
CrclAsp  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
PVW  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Square, Circle  
Square  
Border  
Off, On  
Off  
PinP1 2  
Border  
Width  
0.1 to 100.0  
5.0  
Soft  
Mode  
Fix, Var  
Fix  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
PinP1 3  
BodrCol  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
PinP1 4  
Position  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00  
0.00  
25.00  
PinP1 5  
Rotation  
X
Y
Z
Setting range  
Default value  
–360 to 360  
0
–360 to 360  
0
–360 to 360  
0
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
PinP1 6  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
PinP1  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
Parameter  
Trim  
Manual  
Trim  
Setting range  
Manual, Off, 4:3  
(The setting is  
fixed at Off when  
Circle has been  
set for the Shape  
item on the PinP1  
sub menu.)  
Free, Pair  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Free  
PinP1 7  
TrimAdj  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
40.00  
PinP1 8  
Sync  
Prior  
Synm  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
1over2, 2over1  
1over2  
Off, X, Y, Center  
Off  
PinP2  
PinP2 1  
PinP2  
Shape  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
PVW  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Square  
Square (fixed)  
Border  
PinP2 2  
Border  
Width  
Soft  
Mode  
Fix, Var  
Fix  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off, On  
0.1 to 100.0  
5.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
Off  
PinP2 3  
BodrCol  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
PinP2 4  
Position  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00  
0.00  
25.00  
PinP2 5  
Rotation  
X
Y
Z
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
–360 to 360  
0
–360 to 360  
0
–360 to 360  
0
PinP2 6  
Trim  
Trim  
Manual  
Free, Pair  
Free  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Manual, Off, 4:3  
Off  
PinP2 7  
TrimAdj  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–40.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
40.00  
PinP2 8  
Sync  
Prior  
Synm  
Setting range  
Default value  
1over2, 2over1  
1over2  
Off, X, Y, Center  
Off  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
DSK1  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
DSK1  
DSK1  
1
2
3
Parameter  
Type  
LumKey  
Fill  
PVW  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Lum, Linear  
Linear  
ChrmOn, ChrmOff Bus, Matte  
ChrmOff  
Gain  
Bus  
DSK1  
Clip  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Adjust  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
DSK1  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
FillMatt  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
DSK1  
Edge  
4
5
Type  
Width  
Direc  
Setting range  
Off, Border, Drop, 0 to 4  
Shadow, Outline  
Off  
0, 45, 90, 135,  
180, 225, 270, 315  
0
Default value  
Parameter  
2
DSK1  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
EdgeCol  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
DSK1  
Mask  
6
7
Mask  
Invert  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off, Manual, 4:3  
Off  
On, Off  
Off  
DSK1  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
Right  
MaskAdj  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
Type  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
DSK2  
DSK2  
DSK2  
1
2
3
LumKey  
Fill  
PVW  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Lum, Linear  
Linear  
ChrmOn, ChrmOff Bus, Matte  
On, Off  
Off  
ChrmOff  
Gain  
Bus  
DSK2  
Clip  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Adjust  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
DSK2  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
FillMatt  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
DSK2  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
DSK2  
Edge  
4
Parameter  
Type  
Width  
Direc  
Setting range  
Off, Border, Drop, 0 to 4  
Shadow, Outline  
Off  
0, 45, 90, 135,  
180, 225, 270, 315  
0
Default value  
Parameter  
2
DSK2  
5
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ↓  
EdgeCol  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
DSK2  
Mask  
6
7
Mask  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off, Manual, 4:3  
Off  
DSK2  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
MaskAdj  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
–25.00  
−50.00 to 50.00  
25.00  
TIME  
TIME  
1
TransTime  
Unit  
BKGD  
Setting range  
0 to 33s  
0 to 999f  
Frame, Sec  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
KEY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
PinP1  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
PinP2  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
DSK1  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
DSK2  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
AUX1  
ENBL  
Enable, Disable  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
Default value  
0f  
Sec  
Enable  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
TIME  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
TIME  
8
Parameter  
Setting range  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
EFF DSLV  
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
TransTime  
0 to 33s  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0f  
Sec  
Unit  
Frame, Sec  
TIME  
FTB  
9
0 to 999f  
(When 59.94 Hz is  
selected)  
1s  
Default value  
Parameter  
0f  
Sat  
Sec  
Lum  
CBGD  
BKGD  
CBGD  
CBGD  
1
1
Hue  
Load ↓  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
0.0  
Border  
On, Off  
0.0  
Width  
0.1 to 100.0  
100.0  
Soft  
BKGD  
Border  
0.0 to 100.0  
“-” is displayed  
when the SQ2,  
SL2 or 3D2  
wipe pattern for  
the background  
transition has  
been selected  
using the [BKGD  
PATT] button.  
0.0  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Hue  
5.0  
Sat  
BKGD  
2
Lum  
Load ↓  
BodrCol  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
White  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
X-Pos  
0.0  
Y-Pos  
100.0  
BKGD  
3
CopyTo ↓  
WIPEPos  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
−100.00 to 100.00 −100.00 to 100.00  
Display only  
0.00  
0.00  
BKGD  
4
5
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
CopyTo ↓  
Display only  
SQPos  
−100.00 to 100.00 −100.00 to 100.00  
0.00  
0.00  
BKGD  
Modify  
Light  
On, Off  
Trim  
4:3Auto  
Setting range  
Off, 16:9 (On), 4:3, On, Off  
4:3Smth  
(Selection enabled  
when HD format is  
used)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Off  
Type  
FMEM1 to 4,  
Black, CBGD  
Black  
Off  
Off  
BKGD  
Base  
6
Default value  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
IMG A 1  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
IMAG A  
Parameter  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
On/Off  
On, Off  
Off  
IMAG A  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
IMG A 2  
Paint  
Y-Level  
0 to 7  
0
Hue  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0  
C-Level  
0 to 7  
0
Sat  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
IMG A 3  
Mono  
IMG A 4  
Mosa/Def  
Mode  
Effect  
Mosaic, Defocus 0.0 to 100.0  
Mosaic  
20.0  
IMAG B  
IMG B 1  
IMAG B  
IMG B 2  
Paint  
Y-Level  
0 to 7  
0
Hue  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0  
C-Level  
0 to 7  
0
Sat  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
IMG B 3  
Mono  
IMG B 4  
Mosa/Def  
Mode  
Effect  
Mosaic, Defocus 0.0 to 100.0  
Mosaic  
Select  
AUX1 to 4  
AUX1  
Select  
FMEM1 to 4, ALL  
ALL  
Select  
FMEM1 to 4,  
SetUp  
20.0  
FMEM  
FMEM  
AUX  
1
FMEM  
FMEM1 to 4  
FMEM1  
Mode  
AUTO, Manual  
AUTO  
Mode ↓  
Review  
On, Off  
Off  
Exec ↓  
Exec ↓  
Exec ↓  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
FMEM  
2
Memory  
SDCard  
SDCard 1  
File  
SaveFile  
HS001  
Setting range  
Load, Save, Init,  
Delete, No Card  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
SDCard 2  
CardInfo  
Images  
FreeSpace  
MB/ MB  
GetInf ↓  
CTL  
CTL  
1
Edit-EN  
COM-EN  
RS422  
Setting range  
Default value  
Enable, Disable  
Enable  
Enable, Disable  
Enable  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
CAM  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
CAM  
1
Parameter  
Setting range  
CTL  
1 to 5  
Signal  
Tally  
Enable, Disable  
Protcol  
P/TCont,  
P/TDirt  
CamCTL1  
IN1 to 16,  
IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-  
B1, IN-B2, None  
None  
PosCont  
PanTilt,  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
1
Disable  
PTSpeed  
Fast, Middle, Slow On, Off  
P/TCont  
Power ↓  
CAM  
2
CTL  
1 to 5  
CamCTL2  
Zm/Focs  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Display only  
1
PanTilt  
C-Menu ↓  
On, Off  
Fast  
Item  
Cursor  
On  
CAM  
CamMenu  
3
CTL  
1 to 5  
1
Val/Y/N  
Cursor  
XPT  
XPT  
Status1  
XPT  
Status2  
XPT  
Status3  
XPT  
Status4  
XPT  
XPTAsign  
1
XPT: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
SIG:BK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
2
Display only  
Display only  
Display only  
XPT: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
SIG: 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Sf  
3
XPT:17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24  
SIG:15 16 A1 A2 B1 B2 - -  
4
XPT:25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
SIG:- PG PV KO CL M1 M2 Sf  
5
Parameter  
Setting range  
XPT  
1 to 32  
Signal  
IN1 to 16,  
Shift  
Off, Right, Left  
Sf-Lock  
On, Off  
IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-  
B1, IN-B2, Black,  
CBGD, CBAR,  
FMEM1 to 4,  
PGM, PVW, CLN,  
MV1,  
MV2 (AUX bus  
only), None  
Default value  
Parameter  
Timing  
Right  
Off  
XPT  
6
XPT Swch  
Setting range  
Default value  
Any, Field1, Field2  
Any  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
MV  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
MV  
1
Parameter  
Split  
Pos  
Signal  
MV1 PATT  
Setting range  
16Split, 10Split,  
9Split, 4Split  
(The screen can  
be split into a  
total of up to 20  
screens when the  
number of MV1  
split screens and  
number of MV2  
split screens are  
combined.)  
10Split  
Frame  
LUM 0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%, Off  
LUM75%  
Split  
1 to 16, 1 to 10, 1 IN1 to 16,  
to 8, 1 to 4  
IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-  
B1, IN-B2, CBGD,  
FMEM1 to 4,  
PGM, PVW,  
KeyOut,  
AUX1 to 4  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
1
IN1 to 10  
Tally  
Red, Red+GRN,  
Off  
MV  
2
Char  
Label  
On, Off  
MV1Frame  
LUM 0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%, Off  
LUM75%  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Red+GRN  
MV  
3
Pos  
Signal  
MV2 PATT  
Setting range  
16Split,  
10Split,  
9Split,  
4Split  
1 to 16,  
1 to 10,  
1 to 8,  
1 to 4  
IN1 to 16,  
IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-  
B1, IN-B2, CBGD,  
FMEM1 to 4,  
PGM, PVW,  
KeyOut,  
(The screen can  
be split into a  
total of up to 20  
screens when the  
number of MV1  
split screens and  
number of MV2  
split screens are  
combined.)  
10Split  
Frame  
LUM 0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
AUX1 to 4  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
1
IN1 to 10  
Tally  
Red, Red+GRN,  
Off  
MV  
4
Char  
Label  
On, Off  
MV2Frame  
LUM 0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%, Off  
LUM75%  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%, Off  
LUM75%  
Default value  
On  
Red+GRN  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select. Turn F2 to select.  
INPUT XX*  
Third menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Menu  
INPUT  
Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
FS  
Parameter  
FS  
Mode ↓  
CC  
(SDI)  
1/13  
Setting range  
On, Off  
On, Off  
Normal, DbyD,  
UC, Auto  
Normal  
* IN1 to IN16, A1,  
A2, B1 or B2 is  
displayed for X.  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Select  
Off  
Freeze  
Freeze ↓  
2/13  
Setting range  
Frame, Field  
Toggling between  
On and Off  
Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame  
Type ↓  
Name  
Name  
3/13  
Setting range  
Defalt, Preset,  
User  
Default value  
Parameter  
Defalt  
Scale ↓  
UpConv1  
MovDet ↓  
Sharp ↓  
4/13  
Setting range  
SQ, EC, LB,  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
(IN13 to IN16, A1,  
A2, B1 or B2 only)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
SQ  
EC-Pos  
Center, Right, Left  
3
3
UpConv2  
5/13  
(IN13 to IN16  
only)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Center  
ClorCnv  
On, Off  
CC  
6/13  
Limiter  
CLEAR ↓  
Off, 108, 104, 100 Prc, Trn, MTX,  
ALL  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
100  
Slice  
–7.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
Hue  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0  
Manual  
Free, ALL  
ALL  
GrayLv  
0.25 to 0.75  
0.50  
ALL  
CC Prc1  
7/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
Y-Gain  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
C-Gain  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
RGB  
R, G, B  
R
CC Prc2  
8/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
CC Trn1  
9/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
GrayPos  
0.25 to 0.75  
0.50  
WhiteLv  
0.50 to 1.00  
1.00  
CC Trn2  
10/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
BlackLv  
0.00 to 0.50  
0.00  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
CC MTX1  
R-G  
R-B  
11/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
G-R  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
G-B  
CC MTX2  
12/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
B-R  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
B-G  
CC MTX3  
13/13  
(IN9 to IN16 only)  
Setting range  
Default value  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
–1.00 to 1.00  
0.00  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select. Turn F2 to select.  
Third menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Menu  
INPUT  
Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
INPUT XX*  
(ANA)  
* A1, A2, B1 or  
B2 is displayed  
for X.  
FS  
1/4  
Parameter  
Setting range  
FS  
Mode ↓  
AnaGain  
30 to +30  
On, Off  
Normal, DbyD,  
UC, Auto  
Normal  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Select  
0
Freeze  
Freeze ↓  
2/4  
Setting range  
Frame, Field  
Toggling between  
On and Off  
Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame  
Type ↓  
Name  
Name  
3/4  
Setting range  
Defalt, Preset,  
User  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Defalt  
Scale ↓  
SQ, EC, LB  
SQ  
Select  
UpConv1  
4/4  
MovDet ↓  
1 to 5  
3
Freeze ↓  
Toggling between  
On and Off  
Off  
Sharp ↓  
1 to 5  
3
INPUT XX*  
(DVI)  
* A1, A2, B1 or  
B2 is displayed  
for X.  
Freeze  
1/4  
Setting range  
Frame, Field  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame  
Type ↓  
Name  
Name  
2/4  
Setting range  
Defalt, Preset,  
User  
Default value  
Parameter  
Defalt  
Mode  
DVIIn  
Scale  
Auto ↓  
3/4  
Setting range  
Fit-V, Fit-H, Full  
Black, White, Init  
(“Ana” can be  
selected when  
the AV-HS04M3  
option board has  
been connected.)  
Dig, Ana  
(“Ana” can be  
selected when  
the AV-HS04M3  
option board has  
been connected.)  
Dig  
ClkPhs  
–16 to 15  
0
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Fit-V  
Black  
DVIPhs  
4/4  
H-Pos  
–100 to 100  
0
V-Pos  
–100 to 100  
0
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select. Turn F2 to select.  
Third menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Menu  
INPUT  
Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
INPUT XX*  
(Csit)  
* A1, A2, B1 or  
B2 is displayed  
for X.  
FS  
1/5  
Parameter  
Setting range  
FS  
Mode ↓  
AnaGain  
–30 to +30  
On, Off  
Normal, DbyD,  
UC, Auto  
Normal  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Select  
0
Freeze  
Freeze ↓  
2/5  
Setting range  
Frame, Field  
Toggling between  
On and Off  
Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame  
Type ↓  
Name  
Name  
3/5  
Setting range  
Defalt, Preset,  
User  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Defalt  
UpConv1  
4/5  
Scale ↓  
SQ, EC, LB  
SQ  
Chroma  
–8 to +7  
MovDet ↓  
1 to 5  
3
Ped  
–100 to +100  
Sharp ↓  
1 to 5  
3
Hue  
−30 to +30  
(Enabled when the  
system format is  
set to 1080/59.94i,  
720/59.94p and  
480/59.94i.)  
0
Setting  
5/5  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0
0
OUTPUT  
OUTPUTYY*  
(SDI)  
Asign  
Souce  
Mode ↓  
1/2  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW, CLN,  
AUX1 to 4, MV1 to  
2, KeyOut  
Normal, DC  
* Out1 to 4, A1,  
A2, B1 or B2 is  
displayed forY.  
Default value  
Parameter  
Normal  
Delay ↓  
DownCnv  
Scale ↓  
Sharp ↓  
1 to 5  
3
2/2  
Setting range  
Default value  
SQ, EC, LB  
SQ  
90H(75H), 1F  
90H  
(This submenu is  
available when  
the AV-HS04M7  
option board has  
been connected.)  
Asign  
OUTPUTYY*  
(ANA)  
* A1, A2, B1 or  
B2 is displayed  
forY.  
Parameter  
Souce  
1/1  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW, CLN,  
AUX1 to 4, MV1 to  
2, KeyOut  
(This submenu  
is available when  
the AV-HS04M7  
option board has  
been  
Default value  
connected.)  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select. Turn F2 to select.  
OUTPUTYY*  
(DVI-D)  
* Out5 to 6 is  
displayed forY.  
Third menu  
Parameter 1  
Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
Souce MovDet ↓  
PGM, PVW, CLN, 1 to 5  
AUX1 to 4, MV1 to  
2, KeyOut  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Menu  
OUTPUT  
Asign  
Parameter  
Setting range  
1/2  
Default value  
Parameter  
3
DVIOut  
Size ↓  
Scale ↓  
2/2  
Setting range  
Auto, XGA,  
WXGA, SXGA,  
WSXGA+, UXGA,  
WUXGA  
Fit-V, Fit-H, Full  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Auto  
Fit-V  
OUTPUTYY*  
(DVI-I)  
* A1, A2, B1 or  
B2 is displayed  
forY.  
(This submenu  
is available when  
the AV-HS04M5  
option board has  
been  
Asign  
1/2  
Souce  
PGM, PVW, CLN,  
AUX1 to 4, MV1 to  
2, KeyOut  
Mode ↓  
Dig, Ana  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
DVIOut  
2/2  
Size ↓  
Scale ↓  
Fit-V, Fit-H, Full  
Auto, XGA,  
WXGA, SXGA,  
WSXGA+, UXGA,  
WUXGA  
connected.)  
Default value  
Dig  
Auto  
Fit-V  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
CONFIG 1  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
CONFIG  
Parameter  
Setting range  
BusMode  
A/B,  
PGM/PST  
PGM/PST  
LEDMode  
AW, AV  
AV  
ENBL  
Enable, Disable  
(When Disable  
is selected, the  
system menu is  
locked.)  
LCD-BL  
On, Off, 60, 120, On, Off  
180  
MENUDLG  
Operate  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
On  
CONFIG 2  
SHOT MEM  
CONFIG 3  
SYSCONF  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Disable  
Port  
Port1 to 8  
CONFIG 4  
GPIM-In  
Assign  
GPIEN  
Enable, Disable  
AUTO, CUT,  
DSK1, DSK2,  
PinP1, PinP2,  
FTB, BGDAUTO,  
BGDCUT,  
KEYAUTO,  
KEYCUT,  
RTlyDBL,  
GTlyDBL,  
NoAsign  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Port  
Port1 to 31  
NoAsign  
Assign  
Enable  
GPIEN  
Enable, Disable  
CONFIG 5  
GPIM-Out  
AUTO, CUT,  
DSK1ON,  
DSK2ON,  
PinP1ON,  
PinP2ON,  
FTBON,  
BGDAUTO,  
BGDCUT,  
KEYAUTO,  
KEYCUT,  
DSK1TRN,  
DSK2TRN,  
PinP1TR,  
PinP2TR,  
FTBTRN, KEYON,  
KEYTRN,  
R-Tly1 to 20,  
G-Tly1 to 20,  
NoAsign  
Default value  
NoAsign  
Disable  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
CONFIG 6  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
CONFIG  
Parameter  
Port  
Assign  
GPIEN  
GPIP-In  
Setting range  
Port1 to 8  
AUTO, CUT,  
DSK1, DSK2,  
PinP1, PinP2,  
FTB, BGDAUTO,  
BGDCUT,  
KEYAUTO,  
KEYCUT,  
Enable, Disable  
RTlyDBL,  
GTlyDBL,  
NoAsign  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Port  
Port1 to 8  
NoAsign  
Assign  
Disable  
GPIEN  
Enable, Disable  
CONFIG 7  
GPIP-Out  
AUTO, CUT,  
DSK1ON,  
DSK2ON,  
PinP1ON,  
PinP2ON,  
FTBON,  
BGDAUTO,  
BGDCUT,  
KEYAUTO,  
KEYCUT,  
DSK1TRN,  
DSK2TRN,  
PinP1TR,  
PinP2TR,  
FTBTRN, KEYON,  
KEYTRN,  
R-Tly1 to 20,  
G-Tly1 to 20,  
NoAsign  
Default value  
NoAsign  
Disable  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
CONFIG 8  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
CONFIG  
Parameter  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
Button1  
Setting range  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
Edit-EN, COM-EN, Edit-EN, COM-EN, Edit-EN, COM-EN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
StrFM2, StrFM3, StrFM2, StrFM3, StrFM2, StrFM3,  
StrFM4, SHIFT, StrFM4, SHIFT, StrFM4, SHIFT,  
AUX TRAN, None AUX TRAN, None AUX TRAN, None  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
PinPPVW  
USER4  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
DSK1PVW  
USER5  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
OSD  
USER6  
PinPPVW,  
DSK1PVW,  
DSK2PVW,  
CONFIG 9  
Button2  
Edit-EN, COM-EN, Edit-EN, COM-EN, Edit-EN, COM-EN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIMOEN,  
GPIPIEN,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
GPIPOEN,  
OSD, StrFM1,  
StrFM2, StrFM3, StrFM2, StrFM3, StrFM2, StrFM3,  
StrFM4, SHIFT, StrFM4, SHIFT, StrFM4, SHIFT,  
AUX TRAN, None AUX TRAN, None AUX TRAN, None  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Edit-EN  
OSD  
On, Off  
StrFM1  
Select  
PVW, MV1, MV2,  
MV1+MV2  
PVW  
SHIFT  
CONFIG10  
OSD  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
On  
Fill  
CONFIG11  
KSAsign  
Source ↓  
IN1 to 16, IN-A1, IN1 to 16, IN-A1,  
IN-A2, IN-B1,  
IN-B2, CBGD,  
CBAR, FMEM1  
to 4  
IN-A2, IN-B1,  
IN-B2, CBGD,  
CBAR, FMEM1 to  
4, NoAsign  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
CLN  
KEY, DSK1, DSK2  
KEY  
(Same as Fill)  
CONFIG12  
CLNAsign  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
(Message)  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
The SYSTEM menu is locked.  
SYSTEM  
(When  
Parameter  
locked)  
Display only  
Parameter  
Setting range  
SYSTEM  
(When  
unlocked)  
SYS  
Format  
1
Mode ↓  
HiRes ↓  
16:9SQ  
On, Off  
On, Off  
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/24psf,  
1080/23.98psf, 720/59.94p, 720/50p,  
480/59.94i, 576/50i  
(Selection enabled (Selection enabled  
when SD format is when SD format is  
used)  
used)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
1080/59.94i  
Off  
Off  
SYS  
OutPhs  
2
System  
0H, 1H  
1H  
H-Phase  
–1320 to +1319  
0
BBSetup  
0IRE, 7.5IRE  
V-Phase  
–100 to +100  
0
GenLock  
Locked, UnLock  
SYS  
Ref  
3
Sync ↓  
Setting range  
BBST, BBAD,  
TRI, INT  
BBST  
VAnci  
On, Off  
Off  
Power  
Alarm, NoAlarm  
Alarm  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
7.5IRE  
E.Audio  
On, Off  
Off  
SYS  
Anci  
4
5
6
7
SYS  
Alarm  
Fan  
Alarm, NoAlarm  
Alarm  
F Init ↓  
SYS  
Initial  
Init ↓  
SYS  
NetWork1  
IP Address  
0 to 255  
192  
Subnet Mask  
0 to 255  
255  
Save ↓  
0 to 255  
10  
Save ↓  
0 to 255  
0
0 to 255  
168  
0 to 255  
0
SYS  
NetWork2  
8
0 to 255  
255  
0 to 255  
255  
SYS  
9
MAC Address  
NetWork3  
SYS 10  
Date  
Display only  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Year  
2000 to 2099  
Hour  
0 to 23  
Month  
1 to 12  
Minute  
0 to 59  
Date  
1 to 31  
Second  
0 to 59  
Set ↓  
Set ↓  
SYS 11  
Time  
Setting range  
Default value  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Turn F1 to select.  
SYS 12  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Turn F2 to select. Turn F3 to select. Turn F4 to select. Turn F5 to select.  
SYSTEM  
(When  
unlocked)  
Parameter  
Setting range  
Select  
Version  
SysVer  
Version number  
MainVer  
MFSoft, PnlSoft, Version number  
PnlFPGA,  
CntFPGA,  
In1FPGA,  
In2FPGA,  
M/EFPGA,  
OutFPGA  
MFSoft  
Default value  
Parameter  
Setting range  
SYS 13  
OptVer  
Select  
SLOTA, SLOTB  
Board  
Version  
Version number  
SDI-IN, Ana-IN,  
DVI-IN, DVID-IN,  
SDI-OUT,  
Ana-OUT,  
D/A-OUT,  
Csit-IN, None  
Default value  
SLOTA  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Appearance  
Mainframe  
Unit: inch (mm)  
3
17-13/16 (453)  
18-9/16 (471)  
11/16 (18)  
(76.2)  
3-7/16  
(88)  
Control panel  
Unit: inch (mm)  
G N D  
S I G N A L  
O F F  
O N  
W E  
P
R
O
M A I N F R A M E  
Y
/
G A T P L L I  
1 2 V I N  
2
1 2 V I N  
1
N O R M A L V I C E S E R  
L C D C O N T R A S T  
22-1/16 (560)  
Multi-format Live Switcher AV-HS450  
PAGE  
WIPE  
SHOT  
MEM  
1
4
7
2
3
STOR  
1
4
7
2
5
3
Z
SQ1 SQ2  
BKGD  
WIPE  
MEM  
RE  
CALL  
6
SL1  
3D1  
SL2  
3D2  
5
6
POWER  
ALARM  
PinP  
MEM  
BKGD  
PATT  
HOLD  
DEL  
8
9
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
POSITIONER  
1
4
2
3
6
8
9
KEY  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
TIME  
IMAGE  
IMAGE  
A
B
FMEM  
CTL  
XPT  
MV  
IN  
CONFIG  
SYS  
CAM  
MEM  
KEY  
PATT  
BKGD  
AUX2  
UNDO  
10  
11  
12  
N/R  
R
CKEY  
CBGD  
SDCard  
CAM  
OUT  
5
10  
XPT DSBL EFF DSLV  
PATTERN  
KEY  
PinP 1/2  
AMBER:1  
DSK 1/2  
GREEN :2  
AUX1  
AUX3  
AUX4  
WIPE DIRECTION  
/
MENU FUNCTION  
/
AUX BUS DELEGATION  
USER  
MEMORY  
MIX  
/
AUX  
KEY  
ON  
FTB  
ON  
SHIFT  
WIPE  
BKGD  
MIX  
KEY  
ON  
PinP1  
ON  
PinP2  
ON  
PGM/A  
PST/B  
SHIFT  
16/32  
WIPE  
1/17  
2/18  
3/19  
4/20  
5/21  
6/22  
7/23  
8/24  
9/25  
10/26  
11/27  
12/28  
13/29  
14/30  
15/31  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
SHIFT  
CUT  
AUTO  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Specifications  
Mainframe [AV-HS450U1N]  
Video inputs  
(20 signal lines,  
maximum)  
Standard SDI: 16 signal lines (IN1 to IN16)  
Optional: Up to 4 additional signal lines (IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2)  
(Up to two option boards can be installed in the two input/output slots.)  
BNC 16  
Video outputs  
(10 signal lines,  
maximum)  
Standard SDI: 4 signal lines (OUT1 to OUT4 1 line each,  
BNC 5  
2 distributed outputs for OUT1 only)  
Standard DVI-D: 2 signal lines (OUT5, OUT6)  
DVI-D 2  
Optional: Up to 4 additional lines (OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT B1, OUT B2)  
(Up to two option boards can be installed in the two input/output slots.)  
PGM, PVW, AUX1 to AUX4, MV1 (MULTI-PVW1), MV2 (MULTI-PVW2), CLN and  
KEYOUT can be allocated to each output.  
CLN can be pre-selected from KEY, DSK1 or DSK2 using a menu.  
Signal formats  
SD  
HD  
480/59.94i, 576/50i  
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 720/59.94p, 720/50p, 1080/24PsF , 1080/23.98PsF   
: The following option boards are not supported:  
AV-HS04M1, AV-HS04M2, AV-HS04M3, AV-HS04M4, AV-HS04M5,  
AV-HS04M6, AV-HS04M7  
Signal processing Y:Cb:Cr 4: 2: 2, 10 bit (8 bits for frame memory)  
RGB 4:4:4, 8 bit  
ME number  
SDI inputs  
1ME  
HD: Serial digital component (SMPTE 292M)  
SD: Serial digital component (SMPTE 259M)  
16 signal lines, standard: IN1 to IN16  
20 signal lines, maximum: IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2  
(When two AV-HS04M1 boards are used; with active through)  
HD [SMPTE 292M (BTA S-004B) standard complied with]  
• 0.8 Vp-p 10 % (75 )  
• Input return loss  
More than 15 dB (5 MHz to 750 MHz)  
More than 10 dB (750 MHz to 1.5 GHz)  
• Automatic equalizer 328 ft. (100 m) (when 5C-FB cable is used)  
SD [SMPTE 259M standard complied with]  
• 0.8 Vp-p 10 % (75 )  
• Input return loss  
More than 15 dB (5 MHz to 270 MHz)  
• Automatic equalizer 656 ft. (200 m) (when 5C-2V cable is used)  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Specifications  
SDI outputs  
HD: Serial digital component (SMPTE 292M)  
SD: Serial digital component (SMPTE 259M)  
4 signal lines, standard: OUT1 2; OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 1 each  
8 signal lines, maximum: OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT B1, OUT B2  
(When two AV-HS04M7 boards are used)  
HD [SMPTE 292M (BTA S-004B) standard complied with]  
• Output return loss More than 15 dB (5 MHz to 750 MHz)  
More than 10 dB (750 MHz to 1.5 GHz)  
• Output level  
• Rise time  
• Fall time  
0.8 Vp-p 10 % (75 )  
Less than 270 ps  
Less than 270 ps  
• Difference between rise time and fall time  
Less than 100 ps  
• Alignment jitter  
• Timing jitter  
Less than 0.2 UI (130 ps)  
Less than 1.0 UI  
• Eye aperture ratio More than 90 %  
• DC offset 0 0.5 V  
SD [SMPTE 259M standard complied with]  
• Output return loss More than 15 dB (5 MHz to 270 MHz)  
• Output level  
• Rise time  
• Fall time  
0.8 Vp-p 10 % (75 )  
Less than 1.5 ns  
Less than 1.5 ns  
• Difference between rise time and fall time  
Less than 0.5 ns  
• Jitter  
Less than 0.2 UI  
Composite input  
(option)  
Analog composite signal (NTSC/PAL) (1.0 Vp-p, 75 )  
4 signal lines, maximum: IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2  
(When two AV-HS04M6 boards are used; with loop-through)  
Analog input  
(option)  
SD/HD analog component Y/Pb/Pr (1.0 Vp-p, 75 )  
4 signal lines, maximum: IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2  
(When two AV-HS04M2 boards are used)  
Analog output  
(option)  
SD/HD analog component Y/Pb/Pr (1.0 Vp-p, 75 )  
4 signal lines, maximum: OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT B1, OUT B2  
(When two AV-HS04M4 boards are used)  
2 signal lines (OUT A1, OUT B1) when two AV-HS04M5 boards are used  
DVI-I input  
(option)  
Analog/digital RGB:  
XGA (1024768), WXGA (1280768), SXGA (12801024)  
Vertical frequency: 60 Hz  
4 signal lines, maximum: IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2  
(When two AV-HS04M3 boards are used)  
DVI-I output  
(option)  
Analog/digital RGB:  
XGA (1024768), WXGA (1280768), SXGA (12801024),  
WSXGA+ (16801050), UXGA (16001200), WUXGA (19201200)  
(: Selectable only when digital signals are output)  
Vertical frequency: 60 Hz  
2 signal lines, maximum: OUT A2, OUT B2  
(When two AV-HS04M5 boards are used)  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Specifications  
DVI-D input  
(option)  
Digital RGB:  
XGA (1024768), WXGA (1280768), SXGA (12801024), WSXGA+ (16801050),  
UXGA (16001200), WUXGA (19201200)  
Vertical frequency: 60 Hz  
Digital RGB: 1080/50P, 1080/59.94P  
Analog input signals are not supported.  
4 signal lines, maximum: IN A1, IN A2, IN B1, IN B2  
(When two AV-HS04M8 boards are used)  
The DVI-I connector cable cannot be used.  
For the DVI-D connector cable, use a cable with a length of up to 5 m.  
DVI-D output  
Digital RGB:  
XGA (1024768), WXGA (1280768), SXGA (12801024), WSXGA+ (16801050),  
UXGA (16001200), WUXGA (19201200)  
Vertical frequency: 60 Hz  
Digital RGB: 1080/50P, 1080/59.94P  
Analog output signals are not supported.  
High-resolution multi view mode supported:  
Signals are also output with a high resolution even when SD has been selected as the  
system mode.  
With this mode setting, MV1 is output to OUT5 and MV2 to OUT6; MV1 and MV2  
cannot be output to any other outputs.  
2 lines, standard: OUT5, OUT6  
The DVI-I connector cable cannot be used.  
For the DVI-D connector cable, use a cable with a length of up to 5 m.  
Reference  
input/output  
In gen-lock mode: Black burst or Tri-level Sync input signals (with loop-through)  
In internal sync mode: Black burst output signals 2  
Same field frequencies as those of the system formats supported  
With the 1080/23.98PsF and 24PsF formats, only GENLOCK mode supported  
With the 1080/23.98PsF format, black burst with 10F-ID (SMPTE318M standard met)  
or TRI signals supported  
Video delay time  
FS OFF, U/C OFF  
FS ON or U/C ON  
1 line (H)  
1 frame (F)  
When the signals have passed through DVE, multi view, down-converter, DVI-IN or  
DVI-OUT, a maximum delay of 1 frame is applied in each case.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Specifications  
Control I/O  
PANEL  
LAN  
RJ45  
100 Mbps 1  
When the control panel is connected  
RJ45  
100/10 Mbps 1  
Used for maintenance purposes  
EDITOR  
COM  
RS-422 control connector  
GVG standard protocol subset supported female  
D-sub, 9-pin,  
RS-422 control connector  
For Panasonic pan-tilt head system  
control, etc.  
D-sub, 9-pin,  
female  
TALLY/GPI  
INPUT:  
D-sub, 50-pin,  
female  
8 inputs, general-purpose, photocoupler  
sensing  
OUTPUT:  
31 outputs; selected from R/G tally,  
general-purpose  
ALARM:  
1 output, open collector output (negative  
logic)  
Ambient operating 32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to 40 °C)  
temperature  
Humidity  
10 % to 90 % (no condensation)  
Power supply  
AC 100 V - 120 V, 50/60 Hz  
AC inlets 2  
Redundant power supply standard supported  
Power consumption  
2RU size  
120 W  
Dimensions  
(W H D)  
19˝3-7/16˝18-9/16˝ (48288471 mm)  
[excluding protrusions]  
Weight  
21.56 lbs. (9.8 kg)  
[excluding accessory parts when no options have been installed]  
22.66 lbs. (10.3 kg)  
[excluding accessory parts when all the possible options have been installed]  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Specifications  
Control panel [AV-HS450C1N]  
Control I/O  
MAINFRAME  
RJ45  
100 Mbps 1  
For connecting the mainframe  
TALLY/GPI  
INPUT: 8 inputs  
OUTPUT: 8 outputs  
ALARM: 1 output  
D-sub, 25-pin,  
female  
External media  
SD memory cards  
Memory size supported: Max. 32 GB  
(SDHC memory cards supported)  
Still image files: Load, save  
Setup data: Backup  
Ambient operating 32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to 40 °C)  
temperature  
Humidity  
10 % to 90 % (no condensation)  
Power supply  
DC 12 V, 0.8 A  
DC jacks 2  
Redundant operation enabled by connecting two AC adapters  
Power consumption when using the AC adaptor: AC 14 W  
Supplied AC adaptor  
Rated input: AC 100 V to 240 V, 1.5 A, 50/60 Hz  
Rated output: DC 12 V, 2.5 A, 30 W  
Supplied power cord  
Maximum rating: AC 125 V  
Use within AC 100 V to 120 V.  
Dimensions  
22-1/16˝3-7/16˝11-3/4˝ (56088299 mm)  
(W H D)  
[excluding protrusions]  
Weight  
8.58 lbs. (3.9 kg) [excluding accessory parts]  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Defined below are the terms used in this manual.  
Word  
Explanation  
AB Bus system  
A bus control mode. By executing a transition, the A bus and B bus signals  
are output to the program images alternately.  
Ancillary Data  
The auxiliary data other than the video signals which is transmitted inside  
the data stream of the video serial interface. The data superimposed on the  
vertical blanking period is referred to as the V ancillary data (VANC).  
Aspect ratio  
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of an image or  
screen.  
It is 16:9 for the HD format and 4:3 for the SD format.  
AUX  
[Auxiliary Bus]  
A spare bus which can be switched by signals other than the main line  
output signals.  
AVDL  
A function to automatically adjust the input image signal phase to the  
horizontal synchronization reference signal phase.  
[Automatic Video Delayline]  
BB  
The black burst signal. A full-screen black level composite signal which is  
used as the reference signal for gen-lock.  
[Black burst]  
Border  
The area or margin that is added to the edge of a wipe or key.  
Its width and color can be adjusted. The defocusing of the area around a  
border is referred to as the soft effect.  
Chroma key  
Clip  
This refers to the function for creating the key signals based on the color  
information of the video signals and combining the keys.  
The threshold level of the luminance when key signals are created from a  
key source.  
Color Background  
Cut  
The signals which are output from the internal color generator and used as  
the background image.  
This refers to the effect where the display is instantly switched to the next  
image.  
Density  
A parameter which is used to adjust the density of the key signals.  
Dot by Dot  
This treats images as actual size (1) images. With PinP, it allows SD  
images to be combined with HD images with no accompanying deterioration  
in the images themselves.  
Down Converter  
This is the function that converts material in the HD format into the SD  
format.  
DSK [Downstream Key]  
DVE [Digital Video Effect]  
This refers to the key combination process which is performed at the end of  
the mix effect. The key is always combined with the foremost image.  
This refers to the transition patterns accompanying size reductions or slide  
effects.  
DVI  
A digital video interface standard.  
[Digital Visual Interface]  
DVI-I can handle both digital signals and analog signals.  
Embedded Audio  
This refers to the audio data packets which are transferred inside the data  
stream of the video serial interface.  
Flip Flop system  
(PGM/PST system)  
A bus control mode. The signals selected by the program bus are always  
output as the program images. By executing a transition, the program bus  
and preset bus signals are switched over.  
Flying Key  
This function uses DVE effects to move, expand or reduce key signals.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Word  
Explanation  
Frame Memory  
A memory which can hold the video signals equivalent to one frame.  
Frame Synchronizer  
A function which matches the synchronization of non-synchronized video  
input signals.  
Freeze  
A function which continues the display of the same image, creating the  
impression that the image has been “frozen”.  
FTB [Fade to Black]  
Genlock  
This is the effect where the background image is faded out to the black  
screen.  
A function for synchronizing the video signals using an external sync signal  
as the reference.  
GPI  
Interface signals which control auto transition from an external source.  
[General Purpose Interface]  
Hue  
IRE  
The color tone of the video signals.  
A unit used for video signal levels.  
The setup level (black level) of the signals is expressed as 0 IRE, 7.5 IRE,  
etc.  
Key Edge  
Key Fill  
The border or shadow added to the edges of keys.  
The signal that uses key combination processing to fill in the areas left blank  
by the key signals.  
Key Gain  
Key Invert  
Key Mask  
A parameter which is used to adjust the amplitude of the key signals.  
A function which inverts the key signals.  
This is the function that specifies the area for key combination using the  
box pattern, etc. When only part of the area of the key signals is used, key  
combination is executed with the unnecessary area masked.  
Key Source  
Linear Key  
The video signals for creating the key signals.  
The function which combines keys using monochrome key signals with  
gradations in its outlines as a reference.  
Lum  
The brightness portion of the video signals.  
[Luminance]  
Luminance Key  
The function which creates key signals based on the luminance (brightness)  
information of the video signals to combine keys.  
ME  
[Mix Effect]  
A video effect device which combines a number of video signals to create  
mix, wipe, key and other video signals.  
Mix  
The picture-changing effect produced by overlapping one image with the  
next.  
It is also referred to as “dissolve”.  
Multi View Display  
This function combines multiple materials and displays them on one screen.  
PGM, PVW and the input material can be previewed at the same time on a  
single screen.  
OSD [On Screen Display]  
PinP [Picture in Picture]  
This function enables settings to be performed on the menu screens which  
are displayed in the monitor output.  
This function combines a sub screen image with the background image.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Word  
Explanation  
PVW  
[Preview]  
The function for checking ahead of time the image which will be output after  
the next transition. The image is output from the PVW system.  
PGM  
The bus which always carries the program output signals.  
[Program Bus]  
PST  
[Preset Bus]  
The bus which carries the program output signals after the next background  
transition.  
Preset Memory  
The memory in which the control panel statuses can be saved and recalled.  
The button selection statuses as well as the border, color and other setting  
information can be saved in this memory.  
RS-422  
A serial interface standard. It is the interface used to control the switcher  
from an editor or other external device.  
Sat  
This refers to the intensity of the color chrominance level of video signals.  
[Saturation]  
SDI  
The standard by which video signals in various SD and HD formats are  
transmitted along a single coaxial cable.  
[Serial Digital Interface]  
Self Key  
Tally  
A function that creates key signals from key fill signals for combining keys.  
The signal which outputs the program output statuses of the input signals to  
an external device. The LED that indicates the program output status on the  
control panel is also referred to as tally.  
Transition  
A function that switches from one image to another.  
Wipe, mix and other effects are available for the images during switching.  
Tri-level Sync  
Trimming  
The sync signal used for HD formats.  
This is the function that eliminates the unnecessary parts at the top, bottom,  
left and/or right of the images which are combined using the PinP function.  
Up Converter  
Wipe  
This is the function that converts material in the SD format into the HD  
format which yields a high resolution.  
A video effect in which one image is gradually replaced by another as the  
boundary between the two is moved using a preselected pattern.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANASONIC BROADCAST & TELEVISION SYSTEMS COMPANY  
UNIT COMPANY OF PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA  
Headquarters:  
3 Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-5300  
EASTERN ZONE:  
3 Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7196  
WESTERN ZONE:  
3330 Cahuenga Blvd. West, Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 438-3608  
Government office:  
(201) 348-7587  
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:  
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (PST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880  
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:  
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010  
Corporativo Panasonic de México  
Moras No. 313, Col. Tlacoquemecatl del Valle, Del. Benito Juárez, México, Distrito Federal, C.P. 03200. 01 (55) 54 88 10 00  
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.  
AVE 65de Inf, Km 9.5 Carolina, PR 00985 (787) 750-4300  
© Panasonic Corporation 2009  
D
F0809Y0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Washer T8322 User Manual
Murphy Switch 45TEBP User Manual
NEC Answering Machine SV8100 User Manual
NEC Projector NP 610 User Manual
Netopia Network Router R2121 User Manual
Omron Blood Pressure Monitor HBP 1300 User Manual
Panasonic Electric Shaver ES8023 User Manual
Panasonic Fan FV 05 08 11VFL2 User Manual
Panasonic MP3 Player AJ PCS060G User Manual
ParaBody Home Gym 835101 User Manual